Toyota 2008 Sequoia Owner's Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

2

When driving

Driving, stopping, and safe-driving information.

3

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5

When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

6

Vehicle specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

7

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

1

Before driving

1-1. Key information.................. 32

Keys ..................................... 32

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors ............. 33

Wireless remote control ....... 33

Side doors ............................ 37

Back door ............................. 41

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)................................ 46

Front seats ........................... 46

Rear seats............................ 49

Driving position memory system................................ 59

Head restraints..................... 62

Seat belts ............................. 64

Steering wheel (manually adjustable type).................. 74

Steering wheel

(power-adjustable type)...... 75

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror.................................. 76

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 79

Roof luggage carrier............. 83

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ......................... 85

Power windows .................... 85

Power back window ............. 87

Moon roof ............................. 89

1-5. Refueling ............................. 92

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 92

1-6. Theft deterrent system....... 96

Engine immobilizer system... 96

Alarm .................................... 98

Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.)............................. 100

1-7. Safety information ............ 101

Correct driving posture ....... 101

SRS airbags ....................... 103

Front passenger occupant classification system......... 116

Child restraint systems ....... 121

Installing child restraints ..... 124

2

When driving

2-1. Driving procedures........... 136

Driving the vehicle .............. 136

Engine (ignition) switch....... 145

Automatic transmission

(6-speed models) ............... 148


(5-speed models) ............. 152

Turn signal lever ................. 155

Parking brake ..................... 156

2-2. Instrument cluster ............ 157

Gauges and meters ............ 157

Indicators and warning lights ................................. 162

Multi-information display..... 167

Accessory meter................. 172

2

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers .............................. 175

Headlight switch.................. 175

Fog light switch ................... 178

Windshield wipers and washer .............................. 179

Rear window wiper and washer .............................. 181

Headlight cleaner switch ..... 182

2-4. Using other driving systems ........................... 183

Cruise control...................... 183

Dynamic laser cruise control ............................... 186

Intuitive parking assist......... 196

Electronically modulated air suspension................... 202

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension System)......... 207

Four-wheel drive system..... 208

AUTO LSD system.............. 212

Driving assist systems ........ 214

2-5. Driving information........... 219

Off-road precautions ........... 219

Cargo and luggage ............. 224

Vehicle load limits ............... 228

Winter driving tips ............... 229

Trailer towing ...................... 233

Dinghy towing ..................... 246

3


3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ..... 250

Front air conditioning system.............................. 250

Rear air conditioning system.............................. 258

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ......................... 262

Windshield wiper de-icer .... 263

Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches ........................... 264

1

2

3

3-2. Using the audio system ... 266

Audio system (without navigation system) ........... 266

Using the radio ................... 269

Using the CD player ........... 275

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs ....................... 283

Optimal use of the audio system.............................. 292

Using the AUX adapter....... 294

Using the steering wheel audio switches.................. 296

4

5

6

7

3


3-3. Using the rear audio/video system............................. 298

Rear seat entertainment system.............................. 298

Using the DVD player

(DVD video)...................... 305


(video CD)........................ 314


(audio CD/CD text)........... 316


(MP3 discs) ...................... 317

Using the video mode ........ 319

Changing the Setup Menu settings............................. 321

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)................ 329

Hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone) ........... 329

Using the hands-free phone system................... 333

Making a phone call ........... 342

Setting a cellular phone...... 347

Security and system setup ................................ 352

Using the phone book ........ 355

3-5. Using the interior lights... 362

Interior lights list ................. 362

• Personal/interior light main switch ...................... 363

• Personal/interior lights...... 364

• Interior light ...................... 365

3-6. Using the storage features ........................... 366

List of storage features ....... 366

• Glove boxes ..................... 367

• Coin holder ....................... 368

• Front console box............. 368

• Card holder....................... 370

• Map holder ....................... 371

• Pen holder ........................ 372

• Tissue pocket ................... 373

• Rear console box ............. 373

• Overhead console ............ 376

• Cup holders ...................... 377

• Bottle holders ................... 381

• Auxiliary boxes ................. 382

• Seatback table.................. 384

3-7. Other interior features...... 386

Sun visors........................... 386

Vanity mirrors ..................... 387

Clock................................... 388

Outside temperature display .............................. 389

Portable ashtray ................. 390

Cigarette lighter .................. 391

Conversation mirror ............ 392

Power outlets...................... 393

Seat heaters ....................... 397

Seat heaters and ventilators ......................... 400

Armrests ............................. 402

Rear side sunshades.......... 403

Floor mat ............................ 405

Luggage compartment features ............................ 406

Garage door opener ........... 411

Compass ............................ 416

4

4


5


4-1. Maintenance and care ...... 422

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............ 422

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior............. 424

4-2. Maintenance ...................... 427

Maintenance requirements . 427

General maintenance.......... 429

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................... 432

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance.................... 433

Do-it-yourself service precautions ....................... 433

Hood ................................... 437

Engine compartment........... 438

Tires .................................... 454

Tire inflation pressure ......... 461

Wheels ................................ 465

Air conditioning filter............ 467

Wireless remote control battery............................... 470

Checking and replacing fuses ................................. 472

Light bulbs........................... 483

5-1. Essential information....... 496

If your vehicle needs to be towed........................... 496

If you think something is wrong ............................... 501

Fuel pump shut off system.............................. 502

Event data recorder............ 503

1

2

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ...................... 505

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds.............................. 505

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)............................. 514

If you have a flat tire ........... 519

If the engine will not start.... 529

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ................... 530

If you lose your keys........... 531

If the vehicle battery is discharged........................ 532

If your vehicle overheats .... 536

If the vehicle becomes stuck................................. 539

3

4

5

6

7

5


6


6-1. Specifications................... 542

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)......................... 542

Fuel information ................. 555

Tire information .................. 558

6-2. Customization .................. 569

Customizable features ....... 569

Items to initialize................. 573

7

For owners

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners ..................... 576

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners

(in French)........................ 577

Index

Abbreviation list........................ 582

Alphabetical index .................... 584

What to do if... ........................... 592

6

7

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

8

Pictorial index

Exterior

Hood

P. 437

Windshield wipers

P. 179

Moon roof



P. 89

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 79

Front side marker lights

P. 175

Headlights (low beam)

P. 175

Fog lights



P. 178

Headlights (high beam)

P. 175

Front turn signal/parking lights

P. 155, 175

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights



P. 175

Roof luggage carrier



P. 83

Fuel filler door

P. 92

Side doors

P. 37

Tail lights

P. 175

Rear window defogger

P. 262

Back window

P. 87

Rear window wiper

P. 181

Tires

● Rotation

● Replacement

● Inflation pressure

● Information

P. 454

P. 519

P. 461

P. 558

License plate lights

P. 175

Back door

P. 41

Rear turn signal lights

P. 155



: If equipped

9

Pictorial index

Interior

Seat belts

P. 64

Head restraints

P. 62

Bottle holders

P. 381

Cup holders

P. 377

Front console box

P. 368

SRS driver airbag

P. 103

SRS front passenger airbag

P. 103

Auxiliary boxes

P. 382

10

Rear seats

P. 49

Glove boxes

P. 367

Floor mats

P. 405

Front seats

P. 46

SRS side airbags

P. 103

Seatback table



P. 384

Type A

Personal/interior lights

P. 364

Rear seat entertainment system



P. 298

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 103


P. 364


P. 364

Moon roof switches



P. 89

Overhead console

P. 376

Conversation mirror

P. 392

Vanity mirrors

P. 387

Interior light

P. 365

Sun visors

P. 386

Rear side sunshades



P. 403

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 76

Compass



P. 416

Garage door opener switches



P. 411



: If equipped

11

Pictorial index

Interior

Type B


P. 364

Rear seat entertainment system



P. 298

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 103


P. 364


P. 364

Overhead console

P. 376

Conversation mirror

P. 392

Vanity mirrors

P. 387

12

Interior light

P. 365

Sun visors

P. 386

Rear side sunshades



P. 403

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 76

Compass



P. 416

Garage door opener switches



P. 411

Inside door lock button

P. 38

Door lock switch

P. 37

Driving position memory switches



P. 59

Power window switches

P. 85

Auxiliary box

P. 382

Window lock switch

P. 85



: If equipped

13

Pictorial index

Interior

Cup holders

P. 377

Ashtray

P. 390

14

Shift lever

P. 148, 152

Shift lock override button

P. 530

Map holder

P. 371

Vehicles without rear seat entertainment system

Rear air conditioning system

P. 258

Power outlet

P. 393

Cup holders

P. 377

15

Pictorial index

Interior

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system

A/V input adapter

P. 319

Rear air conditioning system

P. 258

16

Power outlet

P. 393

Cup holders

Headphone jacks

P. 300

P. 377

Vehicles with rear console box

Cup holders

P. 377

Rear console box

P. 373

Cup holders

P. 377

Auxiliary box

P. 382

Seat heater switches

P. 398

17

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch



P. 175

P. 155

P. 178

Gauges and meters

P. 157

Windshield wipers and washer switch

P. 179

Rear window wiper and washer switch

P. 181

18

Hood lock release lever

P. 437

Tire pressure warning reset switch

P. 455

Parking brake pedal

P. 156

Rear window defogger switch



/

Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defogger switch

Windshield wiper de-icer





P. 262

P. 263

Accessory meter

P. 172

Audio system

P. 266

Navigation system

*

Security indicator

P. 96, P. 98

AUX adapter

P. 294

Cigarette lighter

P. 391

Air conditioning system

P. 250

Power outlet

P. 393

Seat heater switches



P. 397

Seat heater and ventilator switches



P. 400



: If equipped

*

: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”

19

Pictorial index


20

Emergency flasher switch

Intuitive parking assist switch



P. 196

Center differential lock switch

*

1

P. 209

TOW/HAUL switch



P. 150

AVS switch



P. 207

Accessory meter control switches



P. 172

Multi-information display control switches

*

3

P. 167

Front wheel drive control switch

*

1

P. 208

Coin holder

* 2

P. 368

Height control switches



P. 202

Power outlet main switch



P. 393

Power back window switch

P. 87

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 145

VSC OFF switch

P. 212, 215, 216



: If equipped

*

*

1

2

3

: 4WD models

: 2WD models

: Vehicles with multi-information display

21

Pictorial index


Audio remote control switches



P. 296

Talk switch



P. 334

Climate remote control switches



P. 264

22

Telephone switches



P. 334

Distance switch



P. 188

Cruise control switch

P. 183, 186

Personal/interior light main switch

P. 363

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 79

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch



P. 75

Instrument panel light control dial

P. 161

Power back door switch



P. 42

REVERSE TILT switch



P. 80

Headlight cleaner switch



P. 182

RSCA OFF switch

P. 115

Power back door main switch



P. 43

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever



P. 74



: If equipped

23

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

Power back door switch



P. 42

Shopping bag hook

P. 408

Back door strap

P. 43

Seatback folding/ returning switches

*

P. 56

Power outlet

P. 393

Child restraint anchor bracket

P. 124

Shopping bag hook

P. 408

24

Auxiliary box

P. 409

Auxiliary box

P. 409



Tie-down hooks

P. 406

Cargo net hooks

P. 407

Tie-down hooks

P. 406

Cargo net hooks

P. 407



: If equipped

*

: Vehicles with third power seats

25

For your information

Main Owners Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models explains and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.

Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

26

Scrapping your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

27

CAUTION

■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

28

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will also see the symbol of a circle with a slash through it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

29

30

Before driving

1

1-1. Key information................ 32

Keys ................................... 32

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors........... 33

Wireless remote control ..... 33

Side doors.......................... 37

Back door........................... 41

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering wheel).............................. 46

Front seats ......................... 46

Rear seats.......................... 49

Driving position memory system ............................. 59

Head restraints................... 62

Seat belts ........................... 64

Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) ............... 74

Steering wheel

(power-adjustable type) ... 75

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ............................... 76

Outside rear view mirrors... 79

Roof luggage carrier .......... 83

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ....................... 85

Power windows .................. 85

Power back window ........... 87

Moon roof........................... 89

1-5. Refueling........................... 92

Opening the fuel tank cap ................................... 92

1-6. Theft deterrent system .... 96

Engine immobilizer system ............................. 96

Alarm.................................. 98

Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.) .......................... 100

1-7. Safety information ......... 101

Correct driving posture..... 101

SRS airbags..................... 103

Front passenger occupant classification system ...... 116

Child restraint systems..... 121

Installing child restraints... 124

31

1-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Master keys

Valet key

Key number plate

■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (

 P. 367)

Carry the master key for your own use and leave the valet key only with the attendant.

■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (

 P. 531)

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

32

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle.

Vehicles with power back door

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Pushing and holding:

Sounds alarm


Opens and closes the power back door

Vehicles without power back door

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors


Sounds alarm

1

■ 2-step unlocking function

When you push , the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

■ Operation signals

again

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked:

Twice)

Back door: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.

33

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Panic mode

When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.

■ Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■ Power back door operation (vehicles with power back door)

The power back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.

■ Wireless remote control battery depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the wireless remote control is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (

 P. 470)

■ If the wireless remote control does not operate

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. ( 

P. 37)

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.

(

 P. 98)

34


■ Conditions affecting operation

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.

● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device

● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity

● When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer

■ Customization

● That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display)

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed.

(Customizable features 

P. 569)

● It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization 

P. 169)

1

35


■ Certification for wireless remote control

MODEL/FCC IDs:

Transmitter: GQ43VT20T

Receiver: GQ4-34R

IC (Canada) IDs:

Transmitter: 1470A-1T

Receiver: 1470A-6R

MADE IN U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

36


Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

■ Wireless remote control

 P. 33

■ Key

Locks all doors

Closes the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)

Unlocks all doors

Turning the key unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again unlocks the other doors.

Opens the front windows and moon roof (turn and hold)

■ Door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

1

37


■ Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Pulling the door handle can open the front door even if the lock button is in the lock position.

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the driver’s door is open and the key is in the engine switch.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

38


Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Operation

Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.

Speed linked door locking function

Driver’s door linked door unlocking function

All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

■ Setting and canceling the functions

Vehicles with multi-information display

 P. 167

Vehicles without multi-information display

To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:

Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the ON position. (Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.)

Shift the shift lever to P or N, press and hold the driver’s door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then release.

The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.

1

39


Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Speed linked door locking function

Driver’s door linked door unlocking function

Shift lever position

P

N

Switch position

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.

■ When locking the doors using the key

The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.

■ Key reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Always use a seat belt.

● Always lock the doors.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

● Do not pull the inside handle while driving.

● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

40


Back door

The back door can be opened using the back door opener. The back door can be locked/unlocked using a key, wireless remote control or door lock switch.

■ Back door opener

Push up

Raise

1

■ Wireless remote control

 P. 33

■ Key

Unlocks all doors

Opens the back window

(turn and hold)

Locks all doors

Closes the back window

(turn and hold)

■ Door lock switches

 P. 37

41


The power back door (if equipped) can be opened/closed using the power back door switch or wireless remote control.

■ Power back door switches (vehicles with power back door)

Instrument panel

Push and hold the switch to open/close.

42

Back door

Push the switch to close.

When the back door is not completely opened, the power back door may not close by the switch.

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.

The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.

■ Wireless remote control (vehicles with power back door)

 P. 33


Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with power back door)

Turn the main switch off to disable the power back door system.

ON

OFF

The back door cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or power back door switch.

1

■ Back door strap

Use the strap when closing.

■ The power back door can be opened when

● The engine switch is in the ON position, and the shift lever is in P.

● The engine switch is off or in the ACC position.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.

■ If the power back door does not work

The back door must be initialized. To initialize, close the back door completely by hand and unlock the back door.

■ Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

43


■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power back door)

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling down.

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. power back door) can be changed.


P. 569)

Rear step bumper

For rear end protection and easier step-up loading.

To get on the rear step bumper, use the shaded area in the illustration.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while driving

Keep the back door closed.

If the back door is open, the luggage will be thrown out and exhaust gases will enter the vehicle.

44


CAUTION

■ Operating the power back door

● Check to make sure that passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught or hit when the back door is being operated.

● Careful attention is needed so as not to get your fingers trapped as the back door automatically closes when it has not been fully closed.

● Do not allow children to operate the back door.

Closing the back door on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door is fully closed.

1

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the back door components

● Do not apply any force or paint or let any other foreign matter collect on the damper.

● Do not apply excessive force when the back door closer is operating.

● Make sure there is nothing in the doorway before closing.

45

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seat

Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat

46

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Vertical height adjustment lever

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment knob

Seat lumbar support adjustment switch

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power seat

Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat

1

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Driver’s seat leg support adjustment switch (if equipped)

Seat lumbar support adjustment switch

47


CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

48


Rear seats

■ Second seats

Separated seat



1

49


Bench seat


*


*

:The center second seat can be moved forward further than side seats.

50

■ Third seats

Manual seat


Seatback angle adjustment lever 1

51


Power seat

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seatback folding/returning switch

52

Moving a second seat for third seat access

■ Getting in the vehicle

Pull up the lever and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.

Move the seat to the front-most position


■ Getting out of the vehicle

Depress the release pedal and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.

Move the seat to the front-most position

Make sure that no passenger is seated on the second seat before depressing the release pedal.

■ After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle

Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.

1

Folding down the second seat

■ Before folding down the second seat

Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position.

Stow the rear seat belt buckle.

53


■ Folding down the second seat

Separated seat

Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback down.

Bench seat


■ After folding down the second seat (if equipped)

Fold out the board from the seatback.

54


Folding down the third seat

■ Before folding down the third seat

Insert the key into the hole on the center seat belt buckle to release tub (with hooked end), and allow the belt to retract.

1

Stow the seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof as shown.

55



Stow the third seat belt buckles.

■ Folding down the third seat

Manual seat (from rear door side)


56


Manual seat (from back door side)


1

Power seat (from rear door side)

Press and hold the seatback folding switch until the seatback folds down fully and the buzzer sounds.

Power seat (from back door side)

Press and hold the seatback folding switch until the seatback folds down fully and the buzzer sounds.

■ The power third seat can be folded down/returned when

● The engine switch is off or the shift lever is in P, with the rear door opened. (from rear door side)

● The engine switch is off or the shift lever is in P, with the back door opened. (from back door side)

57


CAUTION

■ When adjusting a rear seat

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● Do not depress the second seat release pedal from the third seat while the second seat is occupied.

● Be careful not to get your hands or feet caught in the seat.

■ Before folding down a rear seat

Do not fold down a rear seat when there are passengers sitting in the rear seats or when there is luggage placed on/under the rear seats.

■ After adjusting a seat

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by lightly rocking them back and forth.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.

NOTICE

■ When folding down the seats

The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.

■ Second seatback board weight capacity

Do not place any object heavier than 220 lb. (100 kg) on the second seatback board.

■ Before sliding the center second seat to the most forward position

(vehicles with bench type second seat)

Ensure that the cup holder on the front console box is closed.

58


Driving position memory system (if equipped)

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button.

Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.

■ Entering a position into memory

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Turn the engine switch to the ON position.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.

While pushing the SET button, push button “1” or “2” until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

■ Recalling the memorized position



Push button “1” or “2” to recall the desired position.

1

59


Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the driver’s door using the wireless remote control and open the driver’s door.

■ Setting the linked door unlock operation

Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1” or “2” buttons. ( 

P. 59)

Turn the engine switch off then, close the driver’s door.

Push the “1” or “2” button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear a beep.

Open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.

( 

P. 98)

■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation

Close the driver’s door with the engine switch turned off.

Push the SET button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear 2 beeps.

60


■ Retained accessory power

Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column) can be activated within 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened, even if the key is not in the engine switch.

■ If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made

The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the button (“1” or “2”) again.

■ If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased when the battery is disconnected.

1

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another seat position memory button.

61


Head restraints

■ Adjusting the head restraints

Front seats

Lock release button

Second seats

Lock release button

Third seats

Lock release button

Vertical adjustment

Push and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Removal

Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.

Angle adjustment

(if equipped)

Vertical adjustment


Removal


Vertical adjustment


Removal


62


■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

1

■ Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

CAUTION

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

63


Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.

64


Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

1

■ Adjusting the height of the belt

Down

Up

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

65


Center third seat belt

The center third seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched for proper operation.

Make sure that the buckle is securely latched for ready use of the center seat belt.

Matches the tab with the hooked end

Matches the tab with the concave end

■ Release method

The belt can be completely released when not required, such as when folding down the third seat.

Insert the key into the hole on the center seat belt buckle to release tub (with hooked end), and allow the belt to retract.

66


Stow the seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof as shown.

1

■ Extracting the belt

Pull the belt out partially, and then remove the tabs from the cover.

Seat belt comfort guide (center third seat)

If the shoulder belt sits close to a person’s neck, use the seat belt comfort guide.

Pull the comfort guide from the pocket.

67


Slide the belt past the slot of the guide.

The elastic cord must be behind the seat belt.

68

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.


■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.

To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. ( 

P. 124)

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( 

P. 64)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

1

69


■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (

 P. 121)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat

belt, follow the instructions on P. 64 regarding seat belt usage.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

The seat belts cannot be used after a pretensioner has been activated. After an accident, have the pretensioners inspected by your Toyota dealer. Make sure the pretensioners are replaced if they have been activated.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

CAUTION

■ Wearing a seat belt

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

70


CAUTION

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Seat belt pretensioners

Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.

1

71


CAUTION

■ When using the center third seat belt

Do not use the center third seat belt with either buckle released. Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.

■ Using a seat belt comfort guide (center third seat)

● Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must be behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.

● To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket when it is not in use.

● Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not slide off the shoulder.

Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

72


NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

1

73


Steering wheel (manually adjustable type)

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

Pull the lever up.

CAUTION


Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

74


Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Up

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

1

Auto tilt away

When the key is removed from the engine switch, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit.

Inserting the key into the engine switch returns the steering wheel to its original position.

CAUTION


Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.


75


Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using the following functions.

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Normal position

Anti-glare position

76


Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns automatic mode ON/

OFF

The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on.

The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the engine switch is turned on.

1

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

77


CAUTION


Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

78


Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Select a mirror to adjust.

(L: left or R: right)

Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out using the switch.

1

Folding back the mirrors

From outside

Push backward to fold the mirrors.

79


From inside (if equipped)

Fold/extend

80

Linked mirror function when reversing (if equipped)

Press the switch to turn on/off linked mirror function.

The outside rear view mirrors will automatically tilt downwards when the vehicle is in reverse, in order to give a better view of ground.


■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (

 P. 262)

■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. ( 

P. 59)

■ Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (

 P. 76)

1

CAUTION

■ When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.

81


NOTICE

■ If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror.

82


Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Roof rails

Cross rails

1

Adjustment the position of cross rails

Turn the knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross rails.

Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for loading luggage.

After adjusting, be sure to tighten the cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

83


CAUTION

■ Cross rail adjustment

Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by applying pressure forward and rearward.

Failure to do so may cause an accident, death or serious injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

■ When loading cargo

Observe the following precautions:

● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (

 P. 542)

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened to the roof luggage carrier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise unexpected loss of control or vehicle rollover may occur.

● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle occasionally during the trip to make sure the cargo remains securely fastened.

● Do not exceed 150 lb. (68 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

■ When loading the luggage

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

■ Cross rail stoppers

To prevent damage to moon roof, do not remove the cross rail stoppers.

84

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.

Closing

One-touch closing

*

Opening

One-touch opening

*

*:

Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

1

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches and back window switch.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window and back window.

85

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

■ Door lock linked power windows operation

The power windows can be opened and closed using the key. ( 

P. 37)

■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine switch off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.


Settings (e.g. power windows) can be changed.


P. 569)

CAUTION

■ Closing the windows



● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.



● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

86


Power back window

The power back window can be opened and closed using the switch and key.

From inside

One-touch closing

* 1, * 2

Closing

One-touch opening

* 1

Opening

* 1 :

Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

* 2

:During off-road traveling, the one-touch closing operation may be deactivated depending on the vehicle speed and road surface conditions. At that time, close the window using the normal closing operation

.

From outside

Opening

Closing

Turn the key fully and hold it.

1

87


■ The power back window can be operated when

● The engine switch is in the ON position.

● The power back window can be opened when the rear window wiper is working. At that time, the wiper stops working until the window is closed again.

If the rear window is not fully closed, the rear window wiper, washer, and defogger will not work.

■ Operating the power back window after turning the engine switch off

The power back window can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.


If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.


Settings (e.g. rear window) can be changed.


P. 569)

CAUTION

■ Closing the power back window



● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power back window.

Closing a power back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.



● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

88


Moon roof (if equipped)

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.

■ Opening and closing

Open

Close

To stop partway, press the switch lightly.

1

■ Tilt up and down

Tilt up

Tilt down

To stop partway, press the switch lightly.

89


■ The moon roof can be operated when


■ Door lock linked moon roof operation

The moon roof can be opened and closed using the key. ( 

P. 37)

■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine switch off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.


If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■ If the moon roof cannot be closed

If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically, such as when the jam protection function activates accidentally due to a malfunction, pressing and holding the switch closes the moon roof.

■ To reduce wind noise

Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Moon roof open reminder function

An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and the engine switch off.


Settings (e.g. moon roof) can be changed.


P. 569)

90


CAUTION

■ Opening the moon roof


Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof



● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.



● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

1

91

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

■ Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

■ Opening the fuel tank cap

Open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

92

1-5. Refueling

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

1

Closing the fuel tank cap

When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard.

After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction.

■ Fuel types

Use unleaded gasoline. (87 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)

■ Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 26.4 gal. (100 L, 22.0 Imp. gal.)

93

1-5. Refueling

CAUTION

■ Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.

● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

94

1-5. Refueling

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

1

95

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

96

1-6. Theft deterrent system

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the key

Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

97


Alarm

The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected.

■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations.

● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the wireless remote control door lock function or key.

The doors will lock again automatically.

● The hood is opened while the vehicle is locked.

● Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor (if equipped): The side windows are tapped or broken.

● The battery is reconnected.

■ Setting the alarm system

Close the doors and hood, and lock all doors using the wireless remote control or key.

The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm

● Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control or key.

● Turn the engine switch to the ON position.

(The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

98

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following.

● Nobody is in the vehicle.

● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

■ Panic mode



P. 34

■ When the battery is disconnected

Be sure to cancel the alarm system.

If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.

1

99


Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

100

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat. (

 P. 46)

Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. ( 

P. 46)

Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.

(

 P. 74)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

 P. 62)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(

 P. 64)

1

101

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ While driving

● Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

● Do not place anything under the front seats except for putting them in the auxiliary box.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

102


SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

1

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.

Side and curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.

Curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.

103


Airbag system components

Side airbags

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG

OFF indicator lights

Curtain shield airbags

Front passenger airbag

Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

Front airbag sensors

Airbag sensor assembly

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Occupant detection system

(ECU and sensors)

Curtain shield airbag sensors

SRS warning light and

RSCA OFF indicator light

RSCA OFF switch

Driver’s seat position sensor

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

104


The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

1

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, RSCA OFF indicator light, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (

 P. 506)

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The front windshield may crack.

105


■ Operating conditions (front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.

a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. ( 

P. 116)

■ Operating conditions (side airbags)

● The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.

● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will activate even if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. ( 

P. 116)

■ Operating conditions (curtain shield airbags)

The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover. Depending on the conditions and type of accident, there are times when the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) in a front impact.

106


■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or vehicle falling

1

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

107


■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag

(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.

● Collision from the front


● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.


● Pitching end over end

108


■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

1

● A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

109


CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you now sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.

(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals and steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

110


CAUTION


● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. ( 

P. 121)

1

111


CAUTION


● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to sit on the knees of a front passenger while the vehicle is moving.

● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger has items resting on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

112


CAUTION


● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard or steering wheel pad.

These items can become projectiles when SRS driver and front passenger airbags deploy.

1

● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the

SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (

 P. 104).

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

113


CAUTION

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails.

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment.

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).

● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players.

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

114


Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover

ON/OFF (hold for a few seconds)

The RSCA OFF indicator turns on. (only when the engine switch is in the ON position.)

1

■ The switch only should be used

In a situation where inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off-road driving).

■ Operating conditions when the RSCA OFF indicator is on

● The curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a vehicle rollover.

● The curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact.

CAUTION

■ For normal driving

Make sure the RSCA OFF indicator is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

115


Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

SRS warning light

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light

AIR BAG ON indicator light

AIR BAG OFF indicator light

116


Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult* 1

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light


Devices


Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

■ Child* 3 or child restraint system* 4

AIR BAG ON

Off

Flashing*

2

Activated


Devices


SRS warning light






AIR BAG

OFF*

5

Off

Flashing*

2

Deactivated

Activated

1

117


■ Unoccupied


Devices


SRS warning light





Not illuminated

Off

Deactivated

Activated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Deactivated

■ There is a malfunction in the system


Devices


SRS warning light






AIR BAG

OFF

On

Off

Deactivated

Activated

* 1 :The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

* 2 :In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

* 3 :When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

118


*

4

:Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.

( 

P. 121)

*

5

:In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for installing the child restraint system properly. (

 P. 124)

1

CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger's seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pocket).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

119


CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger's airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.

Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (

 P. 124)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

120


Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

1

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child.

● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(

 P. 124)

Types of child restraint

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.

Infant seat

121


Convertible seat

Booster seat

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

Leave the child restraint system properly secured on the seat. Do not store the restraint loosely on a passenger seat or in the luggage compartment.

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (

 P. 64)

122


CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1

123


Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint lower anchor belt. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) ( 

P. 64 

Second seat: Child restraint lower anchorages

Lower anchorages are provided for all of the second seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.)

Anchor brackets (for top strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for all of the second seats and the center third seat.

124


Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

1

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the

ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

125


While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

■ Forward facing  Convertible seat

Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

126

■ Booster seat


While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

1

Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the booster seat.

Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(

 P. 64)

127


Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

Installation with child restraint lower anchorages (second seat only)

Second seat (except center seat)

Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position).

Adjust the seatback to the 4th lock position. ( 

P. 49)

1st lock position

4th lock position

Center second seat (bench seat)

Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position).

Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position. ( 

P. 49)

1st lock position

8th lock position

128

Type A

Canada only

Type B

Canada only


Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the anchors.

The anchors are installed in the lower seatback under a flap. Confirm the position of the anchors below the symbol in the seatback.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1

Latch the buckles onto the anchors.

The anchors are installed in the lower seatback under a flap. Confirm the position of the anchors below the symbol in the seatback.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

129


Child restraint systems with a top strap

Secure the child restraint using the seat belt or lower anchors, and adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.

Second seat

Center third seat

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is securely latched.

Hook

Top strap

Anchor bracket

Open the anchor bracket cover.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is securely latched.

Hook

Top strap

Anchor bracket

130



1

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION

■ When installing a booster seat

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode. (

 P. 69)

● ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.

● Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or seriously injured.

131


CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

● If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forwardfacing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

132


CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

● After securing the child restraint system, never slide or recline the seat.

■ When installing a child restraint system (vehicles with bench type second seat)


Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

● When installing the child restraint system onto the center second seat, secure it so as not interfere with the front console box.

● Do not change the posture and position of the outside second seat once the child restraint system has been secured to the center second seat.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages

When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1

133


134

When driving

2

2-1. Driving procedures ........ 136

Driving the vehicle............ 136

Engine (ignition) switch .... 145


(6-speed models) ............ 148


(5-speed models)........... 152

Turn signal lever .............. 155

Parking brake................... 156

2-2. Instrument cluster.......... 157

Gauges and meters ......... 157

Indicators and warning lights .............................. 162

Multi-information display............................ 167

Accessory meter .............. 172

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers ........................... 175

Headlight switch............... 175

Fog light switch ................ 178

Windshield wipers and washer ........................... 179

Rear window wiper and washer ........................... 181

Headlight cleaner switch .. 182

2-4. Using other driving systems ........................ 183

Cruise control................... 183

Dynamic laser cruise control ............................ 186

Intuitive parking assist...... 196

Electronically modulated air suspension................ 202

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension System)...... 207

Four-wheel drive system.. 208

AUTO LSD system........... 212

Driving assist systems ..... 214

2-5. Driving information........ 219

Off-road precautions ........ 219

Cargo and luggage .......... 224

Vehicle load limits ............ 228

Winter driving tips ............ 229

Trailer towing ................... 233

Dinghy towing .................. 246

135

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■ Starting the engine ( 

P. 145)

■ Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

( 

P. 148,152)

Release the parking brake.

(

 P. 156)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■ Stopping

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N.

(

 P. 148,152)

■ Parking the vehicle

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake.

(

 P. 156)

Shift the shift lever to P.

( 

P. 148,152)

When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.

Turn the engine switch off to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

136

2-1. Driving procedures

Starting on a steep uphill

With the brake pedal depressed, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.


■ Driving in the rain

● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:

● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.


Do not tow a trailer.


• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Drum-in disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down.

2

137


■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (

 P. 546)

■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.


● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

138


CAUTION


● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back door and power back window are closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident.

● Do not turn the engine off while driving.

The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running.

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( 

P. 148

 152)

● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.

● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

139

2


CAUTION


● If you drive through deep water over about 20 in. (500 mm) in depth, put the vehicle height in the HI mode using the height control switch and then change to manual mode by pushing the height control mode select switch.

Drive your vehicle at 18 mph (30 km/h) or less. Do not drive through water deeper than about 28 in. (700 mm) even if the vehicle height is in “HI” mode.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

■ When shifting the shift lever

● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.

140


CAUTION

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following.

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

2

141


CAUTION

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking the vehicle

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

142


NOTICE


● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in P.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering pump.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (

 P. 519)

2

143


NOTICE

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (4WD vehicles), differentials, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

144


Engine (ignition) switch

■ Engine switch

LOCK

The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed.

ACC

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

ON

All electrical components can be used.

START

For starting the engine.

■ Starting the engine

Check that the parking brake is set.


Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine.

2

145


■ Turning the key from ACC to LOCK

Shift the shift lever to P.

(

 P. 148, 152)

Push in the key and turn to the

LOCK position.

■ Steering lock release

When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the LOCK position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either direction.

■ If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

 P. 96)

■ Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

146


CAUTION


Do not turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.

If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the ACC position.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods if the engine is not running.

■ When starting the engine

● Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

2

147


Automatic transmission (6-speed models)

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

148

While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

■ Shift position uses

Shift position Function

P

R

Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

Reversing

N Neutral

D

S

Normal driving

* 1

S mode driving

* 2

( 

P. 149)

* 1

: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in

D for normal driving.

* 2

: Selecting shift ranges S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, control engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.


Changing shift ranges in S mode

Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.

Upshifting

Downshifting

2

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. ( 

P. 150)

■ Shift ranges and their functions

Shift range

6

5

4

Function

Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.



3

2



Setting the gear at 1.

1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.

149


TOW/HAUL switch (vehicles with towing package)

Use TOW/HAUL mode when pulling a trailer or hauling a heavy load.

Press the TOW/HAUL switch.

The indicator will come on.

Press the switch once more to cancel the mode.

■ Gear range display when driving in S mode

The current gear range is displayed on the combination meter. (

 P. 149)

■ When driving with the cruise control system

The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to

5 or 4. ( 

P. 183,186)

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P



P. 530

■ If the S indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to

S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)

■ AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

150


■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)

2

151


Automatic transmission (5-speed models)

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

152

While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

■ Shift position uses

Shift position Function

P

R

Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

Reversing

N Neutral

D

S

Normal driving

* 1

S mode driving

* 2

( 

P. 153)

* 1

: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in

D for normal driving.

* 2

: Selecting shift ranges S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, control engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.


Changing shift ranges in S mode

Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.

Upshifting

Downshifting

2

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if the

AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.

( 

P. 154)

■ Shift ranges and their functions

Shift range

5

4

3

Function




2


1 Setting the gear at 1.

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.

153


■ Gear range display when driving in S mode

The current gear range is displayed on the combination meter. (

 P. 153)

■ When driving with the cruise control system

The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to

4 or 3. ( 

P. 183,186)

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P



P. 530

■ If the S indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to

S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)

■ AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)

154


Turn signal lever

Left turn

Right turn

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.

The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.

The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

■ Turn signals can be operated when


■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

2

155


Parking brake

Canada U.S.A.

Sets the parking brake*.

(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

At this time, the indicator will come on.

*: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reach a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

156

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters


The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Voltmeter

Displays the charge state.

Engine oil pressure gauge

Displays the engine oil pressure.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.

157

2

2-2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display



P. 167

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge

Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature.

158



The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Voltmeter

Displays the charge state.

Engine oil pressure gauge

Displays the engine oil pressure.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.

159

2


Odometer/trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge (if equipped)

Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature.

Odometer and trip meter display button

Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter displays.


Odometer

Trip meter A

*

Trip meter B

*

*

:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.


Odometer

Trip meter A *

Trip meter B

*

*

:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.

160


Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker


With the dial turned fully up, the intensity of the instrument panel lights will not be reduced even when the tail lights/headlights are turned on.

2

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (

 P. 536)


● When the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer.

● When the engine oil pressure gauge does not work properly, immediately stop the engine and contact your Toyota dealer.

● When the automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. (if equipped)

161


Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster (vehicles with multi-information display)

Instrument cluster (vehicles without multi-information display)

162

Center panel


2

163


■ Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

 P. 155)

*

AUTO LSD indicator

( 

P. 212, 215)

Headlight high beam indicator ( 

P. 175)

Security indicator

(

 P. 96)

Shift position and shift range indicators

(

 P. 148, 152)

(4WD models)

Center differential lock indicator ( 

P. 209)

RSCA OFF indicator

( 

P. 115)

*

AIR BAG ON indicator

( 

P. 116)

*

AIR BAG OFF indicator

( 

P. 116)

4HI indicator ( 

P. 208)

(4WD models)

(U.S.A.)

Cruise control indicator

(

 P. 183, 186)

*

Slip indicator

( 

P. 212, 214)

*

VSC OFF indicator

(

 P. 212, 215, 216)

Headlight indicator

(

 P. 175)

Tail light indicator

(

 P. 175)

4LO indicator ( 

P. 208)

(4WD models)

TOW HAUL indicator

( 

P. 150)

(If equipped)

*

Height control HI indicator ( 

P. 202)

*

Height control N indicator ( 

P. 202)

*

Height control LO indicator ( 

P. 202)

(Canada)

164


*

Height control MAN. indicator (

 P. 203)

■ Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (

 P. 505)



1 * * * * * * *

*



2

(Canada) (U.S.A.)



2

(U.S.A.)

*

(U.S.A.)

*

2

*

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota



2 dealer for details.



1

:Vehicles with multi-information display

:Vehicles without multi-information display

165


CAUTION

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

166


Multi-information display (if equipped)

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data.

● Trip information

(

 P. 167)

Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related information.

● Warning messages

(

 P. 514)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems.

● Odometer and trip meter display (

 P. 160)

2

Trip information

Display items can be switched by pushing the INFO button.

167


Zoom display of odometer and trip meters

Displays the odometer and one of the trip meters simultaneously.

Average Fuel Economy

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT

RESET button for more than 2 seconds when the

Average Fuel Economy is displayed.

Current Fuel Economy

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

168

Distance To Empty

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

● This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

● When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

Trip Timer

Displays the driving time.

To calculate the driving time, press the SELECT

RESET button, and to stop the calculation, press it again.

To reset the calculation, press the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds.


Average Speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT

RESET button for more than 2 seconds when the

Average Speed is displayed.

Feature customization

The vehicle can be customized while the vehicle is stopped.

Press the SETUP US/M button to select the item you want to customize unit.

UNITS

2

KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK

KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK

DOOR AUTO LOCKING

DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING

HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER

COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER

DEFAULT SETTING

169


Press the SELECT RESET button to customize the items.

Screen text Select in this order Items

To select Unit A or

Unit B

( 

P. 174)

UNITS Unit A Unit B

Door lock/unlock warning function

Time for automatic door lock function

Double switch operation to unlock all the doors

Automatic door locking function

Automatic door unlocking function

KEYLESS

ENTRY

FEEDBACK

LAMPS + TONE

*

LAMPS

OFF TONE

KEYLESS

ENTRY

RELOCK

TIMER

60 SECONDS

*

120 SECONDS

30 SECONDS OFF

KEYLESS

ENTRY ALL

DOORS

UNLOCK

2 PRESSES

* 1 PRESS

DOOR

AUTO

LOCKING

SHIFT OUT

OF PARK

ABOVE 12 MPH

*

(20 km/h)

OFF

DOOR

AUTO

UNLOCKING

SHIFT TO PARK

*

OFF

DRIVER DOOR

OPEN

Time period before lights turn off (if a door is opened and closed, and engine switch is in ACC or LOCK)

HEAD-

LAMPS

AUTO OFF

TIMER

30 SECONDS

*

0 SECONDS

60 SECONDS

90 SECONDS

Time period before lights turn off

Reset to default setting

* : Default setting

170

COURTESY

LAMPS OFF

TIMER

15 SECONDS

*

8 SECONDS

30 SECONDS

DEFAULT

SETTING


After customize is complete, press the SETUP US/M button to set the selected item.

If the customization fails, the previously setting will be displayed.

If no button is pressed for 10 seconds, the display change to normal display.

■ Feature customization error

• If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated, turn the engine switch off and then on again.

• If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated again, contact your Toyota dealer.

2

CAUTION


Do not adjust the display.


NOTICE

■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

171


Accessory meter

172

Outside temperature display (if equipped)

Displays the outside air temperature. (

 P. 389)

Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped)

Displays the outside temperature and trip information.

(

 P. 160 

389)

Clock

(

 P. 388)

H (Hour) button (

 P. 388)

M (Minute) button (

 P. 388)

INFO button (if equipped)

SELECT RESET button (if equipped)

SETUP US/M button (if equipped)


Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped)

Every time the INFO button is pushed, the display toggles through these information.

● OUTSIDE (outside temperature display)

Displays the outside air temperature.

● RANGE (driving range)

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

● AVG (average fuel consumption after refueling)

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.

● INST (current fuel consumption)

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

2

● Display off

173


■ To select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric unit)


Press the SETUP US/M button to change the units.


Press the SETUP US/M button to display UNITS on the multi-information display. And then press the SELECT RESET button to change the units.

Information

Average fuel consumption and current fuel consumption

Driving range

Outside temperature

Unit A

MPG

MILES

°F

Unit B

L/100 Km

Km

°C

CAUTION


Do not adjust the display.


174

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Canada U.S.A.

2

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in the ON position)

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.

Release the lever to turn them off.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

175

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system (if equipped)

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front turn signal lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system

● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all doors are closed with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position. (The lights turn off immediately if the button on the wireless remote control is pressed after all doors are locked.)

● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the ON position, or turn the headlight switch off once and then back to the or position.



Settings (automatic light off system) can be changed. (Customizable features 

P. 569)


P. 169)

176


NOTICE


Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

2

177


Fog light switch (if equipped)

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.

OFF

Front fog lights ON

178


Windshield wipers and washer

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when INT is selected.)

2

Intermittent wiper interval adjustment (decrease)

Intermittent wiper interval adjustment (increase)

Temporary operation

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

179


■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch must be in the ON position.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle becomes block

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

180


Rear window wiper and washer

Intermittent window wiper operation.

Normal window wiper operation



The rear window wiper operates while the washer squirts.

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

● The engine switch must be in the ON position.

● The back window is fully closed.


Settings (e.g. washer linkage wiper control) can be changed.

(Customizable features

 P. 569)

NOTICE

■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.

181

2


Headlight cleaner switch (if equipped)

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the headlights.

■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position and the headlights are turned on.

NOTICE

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.

182

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.

■ Set the vehicle speed

Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control on.

At this time, the cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.

2

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and push the lever down to set the cruise control speed.

■ Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.

Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph

[1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it.

183

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration

Cancel

Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

■ Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in 4 or 5 in S mode (5-speed models).

● The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in between 4 and

6 in S mode (6-speed models).

● Vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● The operation cannot be switched for 5 seconds or more after operating the front wheel drive control switch or the center differential lock switch.

184


■ If the cruise control indicator flashes

Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control off, and then reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

2

185


Dynamic laser cruise control (if equipped)

Dynamic laser cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

■ Select cruise mode

Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode


Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode


Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the engine switch is turned to the ON position.

Switch to constant speed control mode.

(push the cruise main switch forward and hold for approximately one second)

186


■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set.

■ Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed.

2

■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting

Cancel

Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

187


■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Each push of the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the engine switch is turned to the ON position.

A vehicle symbol will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle if a vehicle is running ahead of you.

188


Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a laser radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.

2

Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead):

When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-tovehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed):

When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.

189


Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed):

When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)

The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead):

When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane

When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising.

■ Fine adjustment of the set speed

Adjustment of the set speed by the following speed can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.

In the constant speed control mode: Approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h)

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

U.S.A.: Approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)

Canada: Approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)

■ Dynamic laser cruise control warning lights, display and buzzers

Warning lights, display and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (

 P. 514)

■ The dynamic laser cruise can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in 4 or 5 in S mode (5-speed models).

● The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in between 4 and

6 in S mode (6-speed models).

● Vehicle speed is between approximately 27 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph

(135 km/h).

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally.

190


■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.

● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)

● VSC is activated

● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.

*

● The windshield wipers are operating at high or low speed.

*


*

:Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by pressing the

ON-OFF button again.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control

The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)

● VSC is activated


■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

2

Distance options

Long

Medium

Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Approximately 245 ft. (75 m)



191


■ Laser radar sensor

Always keep the sensor clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)

Dynamic laser cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

■ Certification

This product is a class l laser product complied with 21C.F.R part 1040.10

and 1040.11.

192


CAUTION

■ To avoid bodily injury

● Do not look into the aperture window.

● Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

■ Before using dynamic laser cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.

■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Turn off the system when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic laser cruise control

Do not use dynamic laser cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

● At entrances to expressways

● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)

● Where buzzer can be heard often

■ When the laser radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm ( 

P. 514) will not be activated, and an accident may

result.

2

193


CAUTION

■ When the laser radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the laser radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

● When towing a trailer

■ To ensure the laser radar sensor functions correctly

Do not do the following to the sensor as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.

● Stick or attach anything to them

● Leave them dirty

● Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks

● Modify or paint them

● Replace them with non-genuine parts

194


NOTICE

■ Handling the laser radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.

● Keep the sensor clean at all times.

Clean the sensor with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction.

If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Toyota dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, surrounding area.

2

195


Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

The intuitive parking assist is designed to inform you of the approximate distance between your vehicle and an obstruction by indicator and buzzer when parking the vehicle. This system uses sensors to detect obstructions.

This system works when the engine switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is not in P.

Back and rear corner sensors work only when the shift lever is in

R.

Front corner sensors work when:

● The shift lever is in R

● The shift lever is not in P or R and vehicle speed is approximate

6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

196

Back sensors

Rear corner sensors

Front corner sensors


■ Intuitive parking assist switch

Press the switch to turn on.

(To turn off, press the switch again.)

When on, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver that the system is operational. At this time, the indicator will come on.

2

The distance and buzzer

■ When a sensor detects an obstacle.

The buzzer sounds.

Back sensors

Distance shown as

A in in. (mm)

Approximately

70.9—39.4

(1800—1000)

Approximately

39.4—27.6

(1000—700)

Approximately

27.6 (700) or less

Indicator and buzzer

Intermittent

Fast intermittent

Continuous

197


Rear corner sensors

Distance shown as

B in in. (mm)

Approximately

33.5—20.5

(850—520)

Approximately

20.5—15.7

(520—400)

Approximately

15.7 (400) or less


Intermittent

Fast intermittent

Continuous


Distance shown as

C in in. (mm)

Approximately

23.6—15.7

(600—400)

Approximately

15.7—9.8

(400—250)

Approximately

9.8 (250) or less


Intermittent

Fast intermittent

Continuous

■ When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously

The buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.

198


Sensors that operate and detection range

The following diagrams show the sensor detection range. Note that sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

■ Detection range of the sensors

2

Back sensors

Rear corner sensors


Perceptible area

A. Approx. 70.9 in. (1800 mm)

B. Approx. 33.5 in. (850 mm)

C.Approx. 23.6 in. (600 mm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.

199


■ Sensor detection information

● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.

• A sensor is frozen.

• A sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.

• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially, but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.

• A towing hitch is mounted to the vehicle.

• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.

• When attaching a two-way radio antenna.

• When a towing eyelet is mounted on your vehicle.

• When the bumper is damaged.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.

● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves

• Sharply-angled objects

200


• Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

• A person near the vehicle (depending on the type of clothes worn)

• When the bumper is damaged.

■ Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

■ If the indicator is continuously on

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ If the indicator remains blinking but do not sound the buzzer

Clean the sensors with soft cloth.

.

CAUTION

■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist


Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

2

NOTICE

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

201


Electronically modulated air suspension (if equipped)

The electronically modulated air suspension allows the driver to control the vehicle’s height in order to adjust for driving conditions.

Select the desired height with the height control switch.

Height control switch

Height control mode select switch

Selecting vehicle height

Higher

Lower

Vehicle height can be adjusted only when the engine is running.

The indicator stops blinking, and comes on continuously to indicate that the mode shift is completed.

■ Height modes

● N mode (normal mode): For ordinary driving

Normal height

● HI mode (high mode): For driving on bumpy roads

1.2 in. (30 mm) higher than the normal height

The HI mode is unavailable when the vehicle’s speed exceeds

18 mph (30 km/h).

202


When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h), the height will be adjusted to the normal height automatically.

● LO mode (low mode): For the ease of egress/ingress and loading luggage

1.2 in. (30 mm) lower than the normal height

The LO mode is unavailable when the vehicle’s speed exceeds

8 mph (12 km/h).

When the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the height will be adjusted to the normal height automatically.

2

Disabling the height control

When the height control mode select switch is pressed, the vehicle height is fixed at the current height.

The height can be adjusted by pressing the height control mode select switch.

When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h), the height will be adjusted to the normal height automatically.

203


■ Automatic leveling function

Regardless of the number of occupants or the luggage load, vehicle height in any mode is always adjusted to a fixed height by the automatic leveling function.

■ When HI mode is selected

The vehicle height will change to N mode when driving at the speeds of 18 mph (30 km/h).

■ When LO mode is selected

● The vehicle height will change to N mode when vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (12 km/h).

● This mode allows for easy access to the vehicle (getting in and out) and easy loading and unloading.

■ The electronically modulated air suspension will not operate in the following cases:

● The underbody of the vehicle is touching the surface of the road.

● The area around the suspension is covered with ice.

The indicators will blink, turn off and then turn on continuously to indicate that the electronically modulated air suspension is not operational.

To re-enable operation, turn off the engine and then restart it.

■ Even if you hear an operating noise

This does not indicate a problem in the electronically modulated air suspension.

■ If there is a problem somewhere in the electronically modulated air suspension

The height control MAN. indicator will behave as follows:

● The indicator will not come on when the engine switch is turned on.

● The indicator will blink.

Although the vehicle may be driven, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

204


CAUTION

■ The electronically modulated air suspension must be turned off in the following circumstances:

Otherwise, the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle’s height to change, resulting in an unexpected accident.

● When driving through water such as shallow streams (Put the vehicle height in HI mode and turn off the electronically modulated air suspension.

Drive at 18 mph [30 km/h] or slower.)

● When jacking up the vehicle, installing tire chains or tying the vehicle with chains/wires for transportation via flat bed truck (Turn the system to the manual mode and stop the engine.)

● When the vehicle must be towed (Put the vehicle height in N mode and turn the system to the manual mode.)

● When the vehicle gets stuck (Turn the system to the manual mode.)

● When disconnecting a trailer (Put the vehicle height in LO mode and turn the system to the manual mode.)

■ Selecting the correct height mode

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the vehicle, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.

● Before you lower the vehicle’s height, check under the vehicle to make sure that no one is there.

● The HI mode should be used for off-road driving conditions.

As the vehicle’s center of gravity is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly.

● Do not select HI mode when you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier.

This may result in a loss of control or vehicle rollover.

2

205


NOTICE

■ Be careful in any place where overhead space is limited.

When changing to a higher mode or after unloading, the vehicle height will rise. This may cause damage to the vehicle.

■ Do not select LO mode when driving on bumpy roads.

If the underbody of the vehicle touches a rugged road surface, the vehicle may be damaged.

■ Do not change the vehicle height frequently.

The compressor might overheat and cause the operation to stop.

■ When on the extremely uneven roads with rocks

Sometimes the vehicle height is not adjusted because it is judged as uneven road driving.

206


AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System) (if equipped)

Adaptive variable suspension system controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions. Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steering wheel operation.

Sport mode

For winding mountain road driving or high speed driving.

Normal mode

For ordinary driving.

Comfort mode

For driving on a bumpy road.

2

■ Driving mode

● Sport mode is suitable for winding mountain road driving, high speed driving or towing a trailer.

● Normal mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

207


Four-wheel drive system (if equipped)

Use the front wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer modes.

* 1 * 2

208

* 1


* 2

: Vehicles without multi-information display

2WD (high speed position, two-wheel drive)

Normal driving.

4H (high speed position, four-wheel drive)

Greater traction than two wheel drive.

When you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping.

The 4HI indicator comes on.

4L (low speed position, four-wheel drive)

Driving requiring maximum power and traction such as climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving and hard pulling in sand or mud, etc.

The 4LO indicator comes on.


Shifting between 4H and 4L

■ Shifting from 4H to 4L

Stop the vehicle completely.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and turn the front wheel drive control switch fully clockwise.

Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator turns on.

■ Shifting from 4L to 4H

Stop the vehicle completely.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the front wheel drive control switch fully counterclockwise.

Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator turns off.

2

Center differential lock switch

Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface.

Unlock the center differential after the wheels have been freed, or after moving to a flat, non-slippery surface.

209


■ Shifting between 2WD and 4H

● Reduce your speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h) and set the front drive control switch between 2WD and 4H.

When the ambient temperature is 5.0°F (-15°C) or lower, shifting from

2WD to 4H can be performed with the vehicle speed below 43 mph (70 km/h).

● If the 4HI indicator does not go off when you shift from 4H to 2WD, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

■ Four-wheel drive usage frequency

You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each month.

This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

■ The center differential lock switch can be operated when

● The front drive control switch is in the 4H or 4L position.

● The vehicle speed is less than 62 mph (100 km/h)

■ Center differential lock system

● When the center differential is locked, the vehicle stability control system is automatically turned off and the center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator come on.

● When the front drive control switch is turned to the 2WD position, the center differential is automatically unlocked.

● If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator blinks. If the indicator does not go off when unlocking the center differential, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

■ If the 4LO indicator, 4HI indicator or the center differential lock indicator blinks

● If the 4LO indicator continues to blink when shifting between 4H and 4L, stop the vehicle completely, move the shift lever to N and operate the switch again.

● If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator has turned on/off, a beep sounds and the transfer position may not successfully change. In this case, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to N and operate the switch again.

210


● If the engine coolant temperature is too low, transfer mode may not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer turn the switch again.

If the 4LO indicator, 4HI indicator or the center differential lock indicator continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able to shift between 2WD and 4H, 4H and 4L, and the center differential lock may not be operable. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

CAUTION

■ Shift from 2WD to 4H while driving

Never move the front wheel drive control switch if wheels are slipping.

Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.

2

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the center differential

● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential.

● Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the loose or bumpy surface.

● Do not push the center differential lock switch when the vehicle is cornering or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.

211


AUTO LSD system

The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when one of the rear wheels begins to spin.

The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on 4WD models.

The system should be used only when one of the rear wheels spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.

The system is activated when driving at a speed under 62 mph (100 km/h).

The AUTO LSD system will be activated with the following two procedures.

● Press the VSC OFF switch briefly.

At this time, the slip and AUTO

LSD indicators will come on.

● Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC

OFF switch for more than 3 seconds.

At this time, the slip, VSC OFF and AUTO LSD indicators will come on simultaneously.

To turn off the system, push the switch again.

212


When the AUTO LSD system is operating

If the rear wheels spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that the AUTO LSD system have been controlled the spinning of the rear wheels.

2

■ If the engine is turned off and restarted

The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off.

■ If the brake system overheats

The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

CAUTION

■ To avoid an accident

● Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above.

A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be required.

● Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.

213


Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Restrains the vehicle from slipping when driving on slick road surfaces or in the event of sudden braking.

■ Brake Assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

■ TRAC (Traction Control) for 2WD

Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

■ A-TRAC (Active Traction Control) for 4WD

Maintains drive power and prevents the all wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

When VSC/TRAC are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the rear wheels (2WD models) or all wheels (4WD models) spin, the indicator flashes to indicate that VSC/

TRAC have been engaged.

A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.

214


To disable VSC or TRAC (2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC or TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

■ TRAC OFF mode

Press the VSC OFF switch briefly.

The slip and AUTO LSD indicators should come on.

The system is in TRAC off, AUTO

LSD on and VSC on mode.

Push the switch again to turn the system back on.

■ AUTO LSD mode

Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds, when the system is in the TRAC OFF mode.

The slip, VSC OFF and AUTO

LSD indicators should come on.

The system is in TRAC off, AUTO

LSD on and VSC off mode.

■ VSC OFF mode

Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds, when the system is in the AUTO LSD mode.

The slip and VSC OFF indicators should come on.

The system is all off mode.

215

2


To disable VSC or TRAC (4H and 4L mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC or TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

■ TRAC OFF mode

Press the VSC OFF switch briefly.

The slip indicator should come on.

The system is in TRAC of engine control off and VSC on mode.

This mode can be used when the transfer mode is 4H mode and the center differential is unlocked.

Push the switch again to turn the system back on.

■ VSC OFF mode

Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds.

The slip and VSC OFF indicators should come on.

The system is all off mode.

216


■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC, VSC and brake assist system

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started and just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ If the brake system overheats

TRAC will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

■ Power steering system operation sound

When you turn the engine switch to ON after the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, a sound may be heard from the engine compartment.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

2

CAUTION

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or serious injury.

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of the gripping performance have been exceeded.

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.

217


CAUTION

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads

■ When VSC is activated

The slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator flashes and a buzzer sounds.

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if TRAC is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appropriate tire pressure level.

The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

218

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Off-road vehicle feature

● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.

● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

2

219

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Off-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

220


Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.

● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.

● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.

● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.

● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

2

■ Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations.

● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

● State Motor Vehicle Bureau

● Recreational Vehicle Clubs

● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

221


CAUTION

■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

222


NOTICE

■ To prevent the water damage

● Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.

● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

■ When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

■ Inspection after off-road driving

● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

2

223


Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

● Be sure all items are secured in place.

● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity)  (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5  150)

= 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

224


(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity 2

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B lb. (kg)  A lb. (kg) = C lb. (kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg)  D lb. (kg) = E lb. (kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

225


CAUTION

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

● Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

226


CAUTION

■ Roof luggage carrier precautions

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or more genuine Toyota cross rails or their equivalent.

When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:

● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.

( 

P. 542)

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 150 lb. (68 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

■ Cross rail adjustment

Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them.

Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

2

227


Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: ( 

P. 543)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

■ Seating capacity:

With separated type second seat—

7 occupants (Front 2, Rear 5)

With bench type second seat—

8 occupants (Front 2, Rear 6)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

■ Towing capacity: ( 

P. 234, 543)

Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

■ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (

 P. 461)

CAUTION

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

228


Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations

● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

● Do not try to forcibly open a window, scrape an outside rear view mirror surface or move a wiper or outside rear view mirror that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

2

229



Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

■ When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

0.2 in. (5 mm) in diameter

Cross chain

0.25 in. (6.3 mm) in diameter

Regulations on the use of snow chains

● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

● Install the chains on the rear tires.

● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

230


■ Snow chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions.

2

CAUTION

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h) regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

● 4WD models:

Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

■ Driving with snow chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden turns and braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

231


NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

232


Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle.

Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.

The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kits, etc.

2

233


Weight limits

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

Model code

*1

UCK60L-GKASKA

UCK60L-GKALKA

UCK65L-GKASKA

UCK65L-GKALKA

USK60L-GKTSKA

USK60L-GKTLKA

USK60L-GKTZKA

USK65L-GKTSKA

USK65L-GKTLKA

USK65L-GKTZKA

Engine

4.7L V8

(2UZ-FE) engine

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE) engine

Driving system

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

GCWR

12000 lb. (5440 kg)

*2

13500 lb. (6120 kg)

*3

12000 lb. (5440 kg)

*2

13500 lb. (6120 kg)

*3

12000 lb. (5440 kg)

*2

13500 lb. (6120 kg)

*3

12000 lb. (5440 kg)

*2

13500 lb. (6120 kg)

*3

14000 lb. (6350 kg)

*2

16000 lb. (7255 kg)

*3

14000 lb. (6350 kg)

*2

16000 lb. (7255 kg)

*3

14000 lb. (6350 kg)

*2

16000 lb. (7255 kg)

*3

14000 lb. (6350 kg)

*2

16000 lb. (7255 kg)

*3

14000 lb. (6350 kg)

*2

16000 lb. (7255 kg)

*3

14000 lb. (6350 kg)

*2

16000 lb. (7255 kg)

*3

Towing capacity

6300 lb. (2855 kg)

*2

7800 lb. (3535 kg)

*3

6200 lb. (2810 kg)

*2

7700 lb. (3490 kg)

*3

6000 lb. (2720 kg)

*2

7500 lb. (3400 kg)

*3

5600 lb. (2540 kg)

*2

7100 lb. (3220 kg)

*3

8300 lb. (3760 kg)

*2

10000 lb. (4535 kg)

* 3

8200 lb. (3715 kg)

*2

9500 lb. (4305 kg)

*3

8100 lb. (3670 kg)

*2

9100 lb. (4125 kg)

*3

8000 lb. (3625 kg)

*2

9600 lb. (4350 kg)

*3

7900 lb. (3580 kg)

*2

9100 lb. (4125 kg)

*3

7800 lb. (3535 kg)

*2

8800 lb. (3990 kg)

*3

*1

: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. ( 

P. 544)

*2

: Without towing package

*3

: With towing package

234


● The gross trailer weight must never exceed towing capacity described in the table above.

● The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR in the table above.

● The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated the Certification Label.

● The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the

GAWR indicated the Certification Label.

2

Towing related term

Towing related term

GVWR (Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating)

GAWR (Gross Axle

Weight Rating)

GCWR (Gross

Combination Weight

Rating)

Gross trailer weight

Meaning

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight.

The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load.

The maximum allowable gross axle weight.

The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

The sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

235


Towing related term

Towing capacity

Tongue load

Meaning

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight.

Towing capacity is calculated considering base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and

150 pound driver.

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, gross trailer weight includes the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing.

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball.

Trailer tongue load

● A recommended tongue load varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.

● In order to ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.

The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the gross trailer weight, not exceeding the following.

(Tongue load /Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)

If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (907 kg), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity.

If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lbs. (2268 kg), it is necessary to use a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity.

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, keep your vehicle level with the ground.

236


The gross trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

Gross trailer weight

Tongue load

2

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.

237


Selecting trailer ball

Use the correct trailer ball for your application.

Trailer ball load rating

Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter

Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.

Trailer class

Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

Shank length

Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads.

Shank diameter

Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

238


Service connector for towing brake controller (with towing package)

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller as shown.

Access the service connector.

Remove the scuff plate.

Remove the clip (screw type) and trim board.

2

Connecting trailer lights

Use the wire harness stored in the rear end under body.

4 pin, 7 pin connectors

239


4 pin connector

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing.

● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.

● Before starting out, check the trailer’s light and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle.

● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.

Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.

● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

240


● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn.

● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a larger than normal turning radius.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

● In order to maintain engine braking efficiency when driving on a long steep downgrade, do not use the transmission in D.

Transmission shift range position must be in 5 in the S mode (6speed models) or in 4 in the S mode (5-speed models).

● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.

(

 P. 536)

2

241


● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

Apply the parking brake firmly.

Shift into P and turn off the engine.

● When restarting after parking on a slope:

With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.

Shift into D or R (if reversing).

Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

Have someone retrieve the blocks.

242


■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (

 P. 553)

● Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.

● All trailer lights work to be legal.

● All lights work each time you connect them.

● The trailer ball is set up at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

● The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched.

Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.

● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

● Depress TOW/HAUL button (if equipped)

■ When connecting and disconnecting a trailer

Set the electronically modulated air suspension system to MAN., or turn off the engine, when the system is in N mode. (if equipped)

■ AVS (adaptive variable suspension system) (if equipped)

The suspension can be switched for improvement in driveability. ( 

P. 207)

■ Break-in schedule

● Toyota recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) to tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.

● Drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer for another 500 miles (800 km/h).

● Avoid full throttle acceleration.

■ Maintenance

● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

2

243


● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km).

CAUTION

■ Trailer towing precautions

● Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Exceeding the towing capacity, GVWR, GCWR or GAWR can cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.

● To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.

● The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch.

■ To avoid accident or injury

● Speed limit for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.

● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities.

● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About

60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining

40% in the rear.

● Do not use cruise control when you are towing.

● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

● Do not tow the vehicle with the temporary spare tire installed.

■ Hitches

● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement.

● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.

244


CAUTION

■ Hitches

● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

■ When towing a trailer

● If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (453 kg), trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

2

NOTICE

■ When installing a trailer hitch

● Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearing, wheels or tires.

■ Safety chain

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer.

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

245


Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

246


2

247


3

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger... 250

Front air conditioning system ........................... 250

Rear air conditioning system ........................... 258

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers....................... 262

Windshield wiper de-icer............................ 263

Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches ......................... 264

3-2. Using the audio system .......................... 266

Audio system (without navigation system) .......... 266

Using the radio................. 269

Using the CD player......... 275

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs..................... 283

Optimal use of the audio system ........................... 292

Using the AUX adapter .... 294

Using the steering wheel audio switches ............... 296

248

3-3. Using the rear audio/video system .......................... 298

Rear seat entertainment system ........................... 298


(DVD video) ................... 305


(video CD)...................... 314


(audio CD/CD text) ........ 316


(MP3 discs).................... 317

Using the video mode ...... 319

Changing the Setup Menu settings .......................... 321

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ............. 329

Hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone)......... 329

Using the hands-free phone system ........................... 333

Making a phone call ......... 342

Setting a cellular phone ... 347

Security and system setup .............................. 352

Using the phone book ...... 355


3

3-5. Using the interior lights ............................. 362

Interior lights list ............... 362

• Personal/interior light main switch .................... 363

• Personal/interior lights ... 364

• Interior light .................... 365

3-6. Using the storage features......................... 366

List of storage features .... 366

• Glove boxes................... 367

• Coin holder .................... 368

• Front console box .......... 368

• Card holder .................... 370

• Map holder..................... 371

• Pen holder ..................... 372

• Tissue pocket................. 373

• Rear console box........... 373

• Overhead console.......... 376

• Cup holders ................... 377

• Bottle holders................. 381

• Auxiliary boxes............... 382

• Seatback table ............... 384

3-7. Other interior features ... 386

Sun visors ........................ 386

Vanity mirrors................... 387

Clock ................................ 388

Outside temperature display............................ 389

Portable ashtray............... 390

Cigarette lighter................ 391

Conversation mirror ......... 392

Power outlets ................... 393

Seat heaters..................... 397

Seat heaters and ventilators ...................... 400

Armrests........................... 402

Rear side sunshades ....... 403

Floor mat.......................... 405

Luggage compartment features.......................... 406

Garage door opener......... 411

Compass.......................... 416

249

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front air conditioning system

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Control panel

Windshield defogger

Driver's side temperature control dial

Air conditioning ON/OFF switch

Automatic mode

Air outlet selection dial

Front passenger’s side temperature control dial

Fan speed control dial

Fan OFF switch

Outside air or recirculated air mode

Temperature control for rear passengers

Rear air conditioning ON/OFF switch

Simultaneous mode

250

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Display

Fan speed display Airflow display

Front passenger’s side temperature display

Driver’s side temperature setting display

Temperature setting display for rear passengers

Using the automatic mode

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

The temperature for the driver and passenger seat can be set separately.

3

251


Adjusting the settings

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

● Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on)

The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.

● Individual mode (the indicator on is off)

The temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (

 P. 258) can be adjusted separately. Operate the pas-

senger’s side or rear temperature controls to enter individual mode.

■ Adjusting the fan speed

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).

The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)

Press to turn the fan off.

252


■ Changing the air outlets

Turn the air outlet selection dial.

The air outlets switch each time either side of air outlet selection dial is turned. The air flow shown on the display indicates the following.

When the dial is set to flows to the upper body.

, air

When the dial is set to , air flows to the upper body and feet.

3

When the dial is set to flows to the feet.

, air

253


When the dial is set to , air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode.

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between (outside air mode) and culated air mode) each time the switch is pressed.

(recir-

Changing the rear seat settings


Press to increase the temperature and to decrease it.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

254


Defogging the windshield

Press

.

The indicator comes on.

The air conditioning system control operates automatically.

Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode.

Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Driver side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

3

255


Passenger side outlets


Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

■ Using the automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer.

● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.

● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.

■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to in situations where the windows need to be defogged.

(outside air) mode

256


■ When outside temperature approaches 32  F (0  C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when

■ When the indicator on flashes

is pressed.

Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

3

NOTICE


Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

257


Rear air conditioning system

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Automatic mode

Temperature setting display Airflow control

Off Temperature control for rear passengers

Fan speed control

■ Button lock function

During Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on), the rear air conditioning system buttons will be automatically locked.

( 

P. 252)

appears on the display when the buttons are locked.

To unlock the buttons, choose the Individual mode (the indicator on

is off). ( 

P. 252)

258



Press .


The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.

Press decrease it.

to increase the temperature and to

Adjusting the settings


Press to increase the temperature and to decrease it.

3

■ Changing the air outlets

Press the desired ,

or

.

Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.

When

is pressed, air flows to the upper body.


259


When

is pressed, air flows to the upper body and feet.


When

is pressed, air flows to the feet.


■ Adjusting the fan speed

Press the (decrease  increase) button.


Press to turn the fan off.

260


Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Roof side outlets


3

NOTICE


Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

261


Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

Clear the rear window using the defogger.

On/off

Press the button to turn on the rear window defogger. The indicator will come on. The defoggers will automatically turn off after about 15 minutes.

Pressing the button again also turns the defogger off.

■ The defogger can be operated when


■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

CAUTION

■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)

The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch them to prevent from burning yourself.

262


Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

On/off

Press the button to turn on the windshield wiper de-icer. The indicator will come on. The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

3

■ The de-icer can be operated when


CAUTION

■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

263


Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches (if equipped)

Some air conditioning features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Temperature control

OFF

Automatic mode


Press .

The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.

Press “  ” on to increase the temperature and “  ” to decrease the temperature.

Adjusting the temperature setting

Press “  ” on the temperature.

to increase the temperature and “  ” to decrease

264

Turning off the fan

Press .


3

265

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system (without navigation system)

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Type A: CD player with external CD changer controller and AM/FM radio

Type B and C: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

Type A

Type B

266

3-2. Using the audio system

Type C

Using the radio

Using the CD player

Title

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Optimal use of the audio system

Using the AUX adapter

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Page

P. 269

P. 275

P. 283

P. 292

P. 294

P. 296

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

3

267


CAUTION

■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.

● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE


Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine is off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

268


Using the radio

Power Volume

Station selector Text message display

(SAT mode)

Frequency seek

3

Frequency adjust

(AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode)

AM·SAT/FM mode buttons

Station scan

Setting station presets (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio)

Search for desired stations by turning

“  ”  or “  ” on .

or pressing

Press and hold the button (from or to

) that the station is to be set to until you hear a beep.

269


Scanning radio stations (excluding XM ® Satellite Radio)

■ Scanning the preset radio stations

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the button once again to stop scanning.

■ Scanning all radio stations within range

Press .

All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the button once again to stop scanning.

XM

®

Satellite Radio (type B and C)

■ Receiving XM

®

Satellite Radio

Press and select the XM

®

band.

The display changes as follows each time

AM  SAT1  SAT2  SAT3

is pressed.

Turn to select the desired channel in all categories or press “  ”  or “  ” on the current category.

to select the desired channel in

270


■ Setting XM

®

Satellite Radio channel presets

Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from or to you hear a beep.

or ) that the channel is to be set to until

■ Changing the channel category

Press “  ”  or “  ” on the .

■ Scanning XM ® Satellite Radio channels

● Scanning channels in the current category 3

Press .

When the desired channel is reached, press to stop scanning.

● Scanning preset channels

again


When the desired channel is reached, press to stop scanning.

■ Displaying text information

Press .

again

The display will show up to 10 characters.

271


The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.

● CH NAME

● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)

● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)

● CH NUMBER

■ When the battery is disconnected

Stations presets are erased.

■ Reception sensitivity

● Maintaining stable radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna and differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear quarter windows. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear quarter windows.

■ XM

®

Satellite Radio

The optional Toyota genuine satellite radio tuner and antenna allows you to receive and play XM

®

Satellite Radio broadcasts. (Subscription is required.

Not available in Hawaii and Alaska.)

*

● XM

XM

®

subscriptions

For detailed information about XM

®

Satellite Radio or to subscribe, visit

®

on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

®

service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character

ID number will appear.

● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM

®

Satellite Radio.

*

:Terms and services provided by XM

®

Satellite Radio are subject to change without notice.

272


■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM

®

tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

ANTENNA

UPDATING

NO SIGNAL

LOADING

OFF AIR

-----

The XM

®

antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM

®

antenna cable is attached securely.

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.

You have not subscribed to the XM

®

Satellite

Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM

®

Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM

®

Satellite Radio.

The XM

®

signal is too weak at the current location.

Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information.

Wait until the unit has received the information.

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

3

273


---

The channel you selected is no longer available.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM

® ing hours

*

.

Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 during the follow-

Monday - Saturday: 6 a.m. - 2 a.m. Eastern Time

Sunday: 8 a.m. - 8 p.m. Eastern Time

*

: Subject to change without notice.

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:

● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.

● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

274


Using the CD player

Power Volume

CD selection (with external

CD changer only for Type A)

Fast-forward

Reverse

CD insert

(Type B and C)

CD eject

Track selection

Random playback Playback

Repeat play

Display text message

Search playback

3

Loading CDs

■ Loading a CD (type A)

Insert a CD.

■ Loading a CD (type B and C)

Press .

WAIT is shown on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.

The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.

275


■ Loading multiple CDs (type B and C)



Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.


The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again.

Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.

To stop the operation, press .

Ejecting CDs

■ Ejecting a CD (type A)

Press and remove the CD.

■ Ejecting a CD (type B and C)

To select the CD to be ejected.

Type B: Press or .

Type C: Press or .

The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.

Press and remove the CD.

■ Ejecting all the CDs (type B and C)

Press and hold

CDs.

until you hear a beep, and then remove the

276


Selecting and scanning CDs (with CD changer only)

■ Selecting the desired CD

or .

Type A and B: Press

Type C: Press or 

■ Scanning loaded CDs

.


The first 10 seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.

Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.

Selecting and scanning tracks

■ Selecting a track

Press “  ” to move up or “  ” to move down using desired track number is displayed.

■ Scanning tracks

until the

Press .

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.

Press the button again when the desired track is reached.

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

To fast-forward or reverse.

3

Type A and B: Press and hold

Type C: Press and hold or

or

.

.

277


Repeat play

■ Repeating a track

■ Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (with CD changer only)

Press and hold or until you hear a beep.

Random playback

■ Current CD

Tracks are played in random order until the button is pressed once more.

■ All CDs (with CD changer only)


Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order until the button is pressed once more.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./Elapsed time  CD title  Track name.

278


■ Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or more will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

for 1 second

If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for

6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.

■ Canceling random playback

3 or

■ Canceling repeat play again.

or again.

■ Error messages

Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Message

ERROR 1

ERROR 3

ERROR 4

Cause

Correction

Procedures

• The disc may be dirty or damaged

• The disc may be inserted upside down

There is a problem within the system

Over-current

• Clean the disc

• Insert the disc correctly

Eject the disc or magazine

Ask your Toyota dealer

279


Message

WAIT

CD OPEN

NO DISC

Cause

Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player

The external CD changer lid is open

There is no disc in the

CD changer

Correction

Procedures

Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down

Close the lid

Insert a disc

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protect features may not playback.

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

280


NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual

Disc.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

● CD player with external CD changer controller and AM/FM radio:

CDs that have a diameter that is not 3 in. (8 cm) or 4.7 in. (12 cm)

● CD player with changer and AM/FM radio:

CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7

in. (12 cm)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs

3

● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-

R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off

281


NOTICE

■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

● Do not apply oil to the CD player.

● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

● Do not insert more than one CD at a time

282


Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Power Volume

Disc selection

(Type B and C)

Reverse

Fast-forward

Disc insert

(Type B and C)

Disc eject

File selection

Random playback

Folder selection

Playback

Repeat play

Display text message

Search playback

3

Loading MP3 and WMA discs

■ Loading a disc (type A)

Insert a disc.

■ Loading a disc (type B and C)

Press .


Insert a disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.


283


■ Loading multiple discs (type B and C)



Insert a disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.


The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the disc is inserted.

Insert the next disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again.

Repeat the procedure for the remaining discs.

To stop the operation, press .

Ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

■ Ejecting a disc (type A)

Press and remove the disc.

■ Ejecting a disc (type B and C)

To select the disc to be ejected.

Type B: Press or .

Type C: Press or .

The number of the disc selected is shown on the display.


■ Ejecting all the discs (type B and C)

Press and hold discs.

until you hear a beep, and then remove the

284


Selecting a disc (type B and C)

■ Selecting the desired disc

Type A and B: Press or

Type C: Press or .

.

Selecting and scanning folders

■ Selecting folders one at a time

To select the desired folder, press “  ” or “  ” on or

3

.

■ Scanning the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder


The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.

When the desired folder is reached, press the button once again.

■ Returning to the first folder

Press and hold “  ” on or until you hear a beep.

Selecting and scanning files

■ Selecting one file at a time

To select the desired file, turn the

or .

or press “  ” or “  ” on

285


■ Scanning the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Press .

The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.

When the desired file is reached, press the button once again.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

To fast-forward or reverse.

Type A and B: Press and hold

Type C: Press and hold or

or

.

Repeat play

■ Repeating a file

.

■ Repeating all of the files in the folder


Random playback

■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order

■ Playing all of the files on a disc in random order


286


Switching the display

Press .

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of

Folder no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title

(MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name.

■ Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or more will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

for 1 second

If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for

6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.

■ Canceling random playback or

■ Canceling repeat play

again.

3



Message

ERROR 1

Cause

Correction

Procedures



• Clean the disc


287


Message

ERROR 3

ERROR 4

Cause


Over-current

Correction

Procedures

Eject the disc or magazine

Ask your Toyota dealer

Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down

WAIT

NO MUSIC

Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player

This indicates that no playable data is included in the disc

Eject the disc




■ MP3 and WMA player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the MP3 and WMA player is being used.

■ If discs are left inside the MP3 and WMA player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the MP3 and WMA player.

288


■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media

®

Audio) is a Microsoft

®

audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

3

289


● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not save any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.

290


● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft

®

, Windows

®

, and Windows Media

®

are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

3

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used ( 

P. 281)

■ CD player precautions ( 

P. 282)

291


Optimal use of the audio system

Displays the current mode

Changes the following settings

● Sound quality and volume balance

The sound quality and balance settings can be changed to produce the best sound.

● Automatic Sound Levelizer on/off

(

 P. 293)

● Rear seat entertainment system lock on/off

(

 P. 293)

Using the audio control function

■ Changing sound quality modes

Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following order.

BAS  MID*

1  TRE  FAD  BAL  ASL  RSE*

2

*

1

: Type C only

*

2

: Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system

■ Adjusting sound quality

Turning adjusts the level.

292


Mode displayed

BAS

MID

TRE

FAD

BAL

Sound quality mode

Bass*

Mid-range*

(type C only)

Treble*

Front/rear volume balance

Left/right volume balance

Level

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

R7 to F7 Shifts to rear

L7 to R7

Turn to the left

Low

Turn to the right

High

Shifts to front

Shifts to left Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or

CD mode.

■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

3

When ASL is selected, turning to the right changes the amount of ASL in the order of LOW, MID and HIGH.

Turning to the left turns ASL off.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

■ Setting the rear seat entertainment system lock (if equipped)

When RSE is selected, turn

until ON/OFF is displayed.

The rear seat entertainment system lock remains on, even when the engine switch is turned off.

293


Using the AUX adapter

This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connect the portable audio device.

Press .

294


■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet or cigarette lighter

Noise may occur during playback. Use the battery power source of the portable audio device to reduce noise.

3

295


Using the steering wheel audio switches (if equipped)

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Volume

Radio: Select radio stations

CD: Select tracks, files

(MP3 and WMA) and discs

Power on, select audio source

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until the system turns off.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows, each time is pressed.

CD player without changer:

FM1  FM2  CD  AUX  AM

CD player with changer:

FM1  FM2  CD changer  AUX  AM  SAT1

*  SAT2

*  SAT3

*

*

: Type B and C

296


Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on volume.

to increase the volume and “–” to decrease the

Press and hold “+” or “–” on the volume.

to continue increasing or decreasing

Selecting a radio station

Press to select the radio mode.

Press “  ” or “  ” on to select a preset station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep. 3

Selecting a track/file

Press to select the CD mode.

Press “  ” or “  ” on to select the desired track/file.

Selecting a disc in the CD player (CD player with changer only)

Press to select the CD mode.

Press and hold “  ” or “  ” on set.

until you want to listen to is

CAUTION

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

297

3-3. Using the rear audio/video system

Rear seat entertainment system (if equipped)

The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.

298

Power outlet main switch

Front audio system

DVD player

Display

Rear seat entertainment system remote controller

A/V input adapter

Power outlet

Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks

3-3. Using the rear audio/video system

Opening and closing the display

Press the lock release button to open the display.

Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle (between 90  and

125  ).

To close the display, push the display up until a click is heard.

The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.

3

Loading a disc

Insert the disc into the slot with the label side up.

The DISC indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded.

The player will play the track or chapter, and will repeat it after it reaches the end.

299


Ejecting a disc


Headphone jacks

To use headphones, connect them to the jack.

To adjust the volume

Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume.

Turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

300


■ The rear seat entertainment system can be used when

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.




■ When appears on the screen

It indicates that the selected switch cannot work.

■ Rear seat entertainment system lock



P. 293



Message

DISC CHECK

REGION CODE

ERROR

DVD ERROR

Cause

Correction

Procedures



The DVD region code is incompatible


• Clean the disc


Confirm the disc’s region code

Eject the disc

3

301


■ Before using the remote controller (for new vehicle owners)

Remove the cover.

Remove the insulating sheet.

■ When the remote controller battery is fully depleted

Remove the depleted batteries and install

3 new AA batteries.

■ If the remote controller batteries are discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

● The rear seat entertainment system control will not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced.

■ When replacing the AA batteries

Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, electric appliance shop, or camera stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

302


■ Headphones

With some headphones generally available in the market, sound quality may be poor. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless headphones.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

■ Volume

● Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body.

● Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the

DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.

3

CAUTION


Do not use headphones.

Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the rear seat entertainment system is not used

Keep the display closed.

In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant's body, resulting in injury.

■ To prevent accidents and electric shock

Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller.

■ When the remote controller is not used

Stow the remote controller.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

■ Removed batteries and other parts

Keep away from children.

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

303


NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the batteries


● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller.

● Do not bend any of the battery terminals.

304


Using the DVD player (DVD video)

■ Remote controller

Turning on the DVD mode

Turning on/off the control icon screen

Selecting a chapter

Reversing a disc

Turning on the menu screen

Turning on the title selection screen

Searching the title

Changing the screen angle

Inputting the selected control icon

Turning off the screen

Selecting a control icon

Playing/pausing a disc

Fast-forwarding a disc

Stopping a disc

Changing the subtitle language

Changing the audio language

3

305


■ Unit

Ejecting a disc


Skipping to the desired chapter





306


■ Control icon screen (Page1)


Turning off the control icon screen on the screen

Displaying control icon screen page 2

Turning on/off the title selection screen for the disc

Turning on/off the menu screen for the disc

Reversing a disc

Stopping a disc



3

Displaying the initial setting screen


Searching the title

Returning to the previous screen

Changing the audio language

Changing the subtitle language

Changing the angle

307


NOTICE

■ Cleaning the screen

Wipe the screen with a dry soft cloth.

If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched.

■ To prevent damage to the remote controller

● Keep the remote controller away from direct sunlight, heat and high humidity.

● Do not drop or knock the remote controller against hard objects.

● Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller.

■ DVD player

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.

Turning on/off the control icon screen

Press

Press icon screen.

or

or

to turn on the control icon screen.

once again or select to turn off the control

Turning on the title selection screen

Press or select to turn on the title selection screen. For the operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Turning on the menu screen

Press or select to turn on the menu screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

308


Returning to the previous screen

Select to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Searching for a title

Press or select to display the screen to search for a title.

Select the title number, and press

or to input it.

3

Select vious screen.

to return to the pre-

Changing the subtitle language

Press or select to display the subtitle language screen.

Each time is pressed or

is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected.



309


Changing the audio language

Press or select to display the audio language screen.


is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected.



Changing the angle

Press or select to display the screen to change the angle.


is selected, the angle changes.



310


■ DVD player and DVD video discs

This DVD player is compatible with NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.

■ Region codes

Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use them. If the DVD video disc is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the

DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use it.

■ Marks shown on DVD video discs

Indicates NTSC format of color TV.

3

Indicates the number of audio tracks.

Indicates the number of language subtitles.

Indicates the number of angles.

Indicates the screen to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in which this video disc can be played.

All: all countries

Number: region code

311


■ DVD video disc glossary

● DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discs that hold world’s standard video.

DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/

40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology has been adopted in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format. Audio data is stored using PCM and

Dolby digital, which enables higher sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

● Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.

• Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

● Multi-angle feature: Allows you to enjoy the same scene at different angles.

● Multi-language feature: Allows you to select the language of the subtitles and audio.

● Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the

DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player.

● Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played.

● Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided into sections by title and chapter.

● Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

● Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises multiple chapters.

312


■ Audio

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby

Digital”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Confidential unpublished works.



1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

3

313


Using the DVD player (video CD)

■ Remote controller

■ Unit



Selecting a chapter

Reversing a disc

Searching the disc menu number


Turning off the screen




Stopping a disc

Changing the initial setting

Ejecting a disc


Skipping to the desired chapter





314




Selecting a disc menu number

Turning off the menu screen


Turning on the disc menu

Returning to the previous page screen (with the disc menu displayed)

Proceeding to the next page screen (with the disc menu displayed)

Changing to a multiplex transmission


Reversing a disc



3

Selecting a disc menu number

Select to display the disc menu number search screen.

Select the disc menu number, and press

Select to return to the previous screen.

or to input it.

315


Using the DVD player (audio CD/CD text)

■ Control screen

Press or play the control screen.

to dis-

Repeat play

Random playback

Search playback

Repeat play

■ Repeating a track

Select .

Random playback

■ Playing all of the tracks on a CD in random order

Select .

Search playback

■ Scanning tracks

Select .

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.

Select again when the desired track is reached.

■ Canceling repeat play and random playback

Select or once again.

316


Using the DVD player (MP3 discs)

■ Control screen

Press or play the control screen.

to dis-

Repeat play

Random playback

Search playback

Displaying file information

Selecting a folder

Repeat play

■ Repeating a file

Select .

■ Repeating all of the files in the folder

Select , and press and hold or .

Random playback

■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order

Select .

■ Playing all of the files on a disc in random order


3

317


Selecting and scanning folders

■ Selecting folders one at a time

To select the desired folder, select or .

■ Scanning the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder


The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.

When the desired folder is reached, select again.

once

Scanning files

■ Scanning the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Select .

The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.

When the desired file is reached, select once again.

Displaying file information.

Select .

■ Canceling repeat play and random playback

Select or once again.

318


Using the video mode

Press or the video mode.

to select

Before switching to the video mode, connect the audio source to the A/V input adapter.

Using the A/V input adapter

Open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

White: Left channel audio input adapter

Red: Right channel audio input adapter

3

■ A/V input adapter

The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audiovisual equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.

■ Power outlet

The power outlet can be used to connect the audio-visual device. (

 P. 393)

319


NOTICE

■ When the A/V input adapter is not in use

Keep the A/V input adapter cover closed.

Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a short circuit.

320


Changing the Setup Menu settings

Press or select to display the initial setting screen.

The following settings can be customized here.

● Audio language

● Subtitle language

● DVD language

● Angle mark

● Parental lock

3

Changing the audio language

Select .

Select the language you want to hear, and press input it.

or to

321


Select if you cannot find the language you would like to hear.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (

 P. 326)

Select a number, and press

or to input it.

If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen.

Changing the subtitle language

Select .

Select the language you would like to read, and press

to input it.

or

Select if you cannot find the language you would like to read.


 P. 326)


or to input it.


322


Changing the DVD language

Select .

Select the language you would like to hear and press

to input it.

or

Select if you cannot find the language you would like to hear.


 P. 326)


3

or to input it.


Turning on/off the angle mark

The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle compatible.

Each time you press angle mark turns on or off.

or when is selected, the

323


Setting viewer restriction levels

Setting a personal code allows the viewer restriction to be used.

Select .

Enter a personal code and press

or .

The setting cannot be changed unless a personal code is entered.

When you forget a personal code, initialize a personal code.

(

 P. 326)

Select a restriction level (1-8), and press or . The smaller the level number, the stricter the restrictions.

Initializing all menus

Select .

Turning off the Setup Menu screen

Select .

324


Setting the display mode

Pressing changes the display mode sequentially as follows:

Normal  Wide 1  Wide 2

Returning to the previous screen

Select to return to the previous screen.

3

325


■ To initialize the password

Press on the remote controller or unit ten times when the Enter Personal

Code screen is displayed.

■ Language code list

1620

1922

1821

1115

0512

0101

0102

0106

Code

0514

0618

0405

0920

0519

2608

1412

0113

0118

0119

0125

0126

0201

0205

0207

Language

English

French

German

Italian

Spanish

Chinese

Dutch

Portuguese

Swedish

Russian

Korean

Greek

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Amharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Byelorussian

Bulgarian

0319

0325

0401

0426

0515

0520

0521

0601

Code

0208

0209

0214

0215

0218

0301

0315

0609

0610

0615

0625

0701

0704

0712

0714

Language

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Frisian

Irish

Scots-Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

326

Japanese

Yiddish

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian

Malagasy

Maori

Language

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

1119

1121

1125

1201

1214

1215

1220

1222

1307

1309

1001

1009

1023

1101

1111

1112

1113

1114

Code

0721

0801

0809

0818

0821

0825

0901

0905

0911

0914

0919

0923


Language

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Punjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Romanian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sangho

Serbo-Croatian

Sinhalese

Slovak

Slovenian

Samoan

1815

1823

1901

1904

1907

1908

1909

1911

1912

1913

1513

1518

1601

1612

1619

1721

1813

1814

Code

1311

1312

1314

1315

1318

1319

1320

1325

1401

1405

1415

1503 3

327


Code

1914

1915

1917

1918

1919

1920

1921

1923

2001

2005

2007

2008

2009

2011

2012

■ Adjusting the screen

Language

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

Turkmen

Tagalog

Code

2014

2015

2018

2019

2020

2023

2111

2118

2126

2209

2215

2315

2408

2515

2621

Language

Setswana

Tonga

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapük

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Press .

Select the brightness, contrast, tone or color, and make adjustments. Press

or or to input it.

Brightness

Contrast

Tone

Color

“-” or “Red”

Darkens

Weakens the contrast

Weakens the tone

Strengthens the red color

“+” or “Green”

Brightens

Strengthens the contrast

Strengthens the tone

Strengthens the green color

328

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) (if equipped)

This system supports Bluetooth

®

, which allows you connect a cellular phone without using cables and to make or receive calls without operating the cell phone buttons.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Title

Using the hands-free phone system

Making a phone call

Setting a cellular phone

Security and system setup

Using the phone book

Page

P. 333

P. 342

P. 347

P. 352

P. 355

3

■ When using the hands-free system

● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time it may be difficult to hear.

● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

● In the following circumstances it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• If driving on unpaved roads

• If driving at high speeds

• If a window is open

• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If the air conditioning fan speed is set to high

329

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth ®

● If the cellular phone is switched off

● If you are outside service range

● If the cellular phone is not connected

● If the cellular phone's battery is low

■ Bluetooth ® antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

■ Signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself.

■ About Bluetooth ®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

■ Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push

Profile) Ver. 1.1.

If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth ® phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth ® phone.

330


■ Certification for the hands-free phone system

FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A

IC ID: 1551A-BTAU01A

MADE IN MEXICO

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

3

331


FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION:

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person’s body

(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).

Co-location:

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

CAUTION


Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth

®

phone.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the phone.

332


Using the hands-free phone system

■ Audio unit

Displays Bluetooth

®

connection condition

If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used.

Displays the reception level

Displays such items as numbers, names, messages and menu items

Press and hold: Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the screen

Selects speed dials

Selects items such as numbers or menu items

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected item

3

333


■ Steering wheel telephone switches

Type A

Volume

The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted by using this switch.

Hands-free phone system off/ends a call/refuses a call

Hands-free phone system on/starts a call

Press: Voice command system on

Press and hold: Voice command system off

334

Type B


Volume

The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted by using this switch.

Hands-free phone system off/ends a call/refuses a call

Hands-free phone system on/starts a call

Press: Voice command system on

Press and hold: Voice command system off

3

■ Microphone

335


Operating the system by using a voice command

By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, you can speak voice commands aloud to control the hands-free phone system without looking at the display or operating .

■ Operation procedure when using voice commands

Press or function. (

 P. 337)

and say a voice command for a desired

■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice command

The following auxiliary voice commands can be used at any time when operating the system using voice commands:

“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction

“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure

“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system

“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone:

The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard.

336


Register a phone name by either of the following methods.

a. Select “(RECORD NAME)” by using , and say aloud the name you would like to register for the phone.

b. Press or and say aloud the name you would like to register for the phone.

You will hear voice guidance instructing you to confirm the input.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.

Input the passkey into the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

3

Menu list of the hands-free phone system

■ Voice commands (MENU ITEMS)

First menu

Second menu

Third menu

Dial by name

Dial by number

Redial

(REDIAL)

-

-

-

-

-

-

Operation detail

Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book

Dialing by inputting a phone number

Dialing a phone number stored in the outgoing history memory

337


First menu

Callback

(CALLBACK)

Phone book

(PHONE

BOOK)

Second menu

-

Add entry

(ADD

ENTRY)

Change name

(CHANGE

NAME)

List names

(LIST

NAMES)

Set speed dial

(SPEED

DIAL)

Delete entry

(DELETE

ENTRY)

Delete speed dial

(DEL SPD

DIAL)

Third menu

-

Operation detail

Dialing a phone number stored in the incoming history memory

By voice

(BY VOICE)

By phone

(BY PHONE)

Call history

(CALL

HISTORY)

(MANUAL

INPUT)

Adding a new phone number

-

Changing the name of a phone number in the phone book

-

-

-

-

Listing the phone book data

Registering a speed dial

Deleting the phone book data

Deleting a registered speed dial

338


First menu

Setup

(SETUP)

Second menu

Security

(SECU-

RITY)

Phone setup

(PHONE

SETUP)

(SYSTEM

SETUP)

Third menu

Set PIN

(SET PIN)

Phone book lock

(PHBK

LOCK)

Phone book unlock

(PHBK

UNLOCK)

Pair phone

(PAIR

PHONE)

Select phone

(SELECT

PHONE)

Change name

(CHANGE

NAME)

List phones

(LIST

PHONES)

Set passkey

(SET

PASSKEY)

Delete

(DELETE)

(GUIDANCE

VOL)

(INITIALIZE)

Operation detail

Setting a PIN

Locking the phone book

Unlocking the phone book

Registering a cellular phone to be used

Selecting a cellular phone to be used

Changing a registered name of a cellular phone

Listing the registered cellular phones

Changing the passkey

Deleting a registered cellular phone

Setting voice guidance volume

Initialization

3

339


■ Using a short cut voice command

First menu Second menu

Dial “XXX (name)” -

Phone book add entry

Phone book change name

Phone book list names

Phone book set speed dial

Phone book delete entry

Phone book delete speed dial

Phone book

-

-

-

-

-

-

Phone book unlock

Phone book lock

Operation detail

Dialing a phone number registered in the phone book

Adding a new phone number

Changing the name of a phone number in the phone book

Listing the phone book data

Registering speed dial

Deleting phone book data

Deleting speed dial

Unlocking the phone book

Locking the phone book

340


■ Automatic adjustment of volume

When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.

■ When using a voice command

● For numbers, speak a combination of single digits from zero to nine, #

(pound),  (star), and + (plus).

● Speak the command correctly and clearly.

■ The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:

● When driving on a rough road

● When driving at high speeds

● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

■ The following cannot be performed while driving:

3

● Operating the system with

● Registering a cellular phone to the system

■ Changing the passkey



P. 350

341


Making a phone call

■ Making a phone call

● Dialing by inputting a phone number

“Dial by number”

● Dialing by inputting a name

“Dial by name”

● Speed dialing

● Dialing a phone number stored in the outgoing history memory

“Redial”

● Dialing a phone number stored in the incoming history memory

“Callback”

■ Receiving a phone call

● Answering the phone

● Refusing the call

■ Transferring a call

■ Using a call history memory

● Dialing

● Storing data in the phone book

● Deleting

Dialing by inputting a phone number

Press

Press

or

or

and say “Dial by number”.

and say the phone number.

342


Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press .

b. Press or and say “Dial”.

.

c. Select “Dial” by using

Dialing by inputting a name

Press or and say “Dial by name”.

Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods:

3 a. Press or and say a registered name.

b. Press or and say “List names”. Press or while the desired name is being read aloud.

Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press .

b. Press or and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

343


Speed dialing

Press .

Press the preset button in which the desired phone number is registered.

Press .

When receiving a phone call

■ Answering the phone

Press .

■ Refusing the call

Press .

Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or conversing a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

c. Press or and say “Call Transfer” *2 .

*1

: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

*2 : While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone.

344


Using a call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use a phone number stored in call history memory:

Press or and say “Redial” (when using a phone number stored in the outgoing history memory) or “Callback”

(when using a phone number stored in the incoming history memory).

Select the phone number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired phone number is displayed.

3 b. Select the desired phone number by using .

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press or select “Dial” by using a voice command or

.

Storing the phone number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice command or .

Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

345


■ A shortcut to Redial is available

Press the twice.

■ Muting your voice

Your voice can be muted so that the other party cannot hear your voice during a call.

To set or cancel: Press or and say “Mute”.

■ Call history

Up to 5 phone numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history memories.

■ When talking on the phone

● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.

● Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.

346


Setting a cellular phone

Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following function can be used for registered cellular phones:

■ Functions and operation procedures

To enter a menu for each function, follow the steps below by using voice commands or :

● Registering a cellular phone

1. “Setup”  2. “Phone setup”  3. “Pair phone”

● Selecting a cellular phone to be used

1. “Setup”  2. “Phone setup”  3. “Select phone”

● Changing a registered name

1. “Setup”  2. “Phone setup”  3. “Change name”

● Listing the registered cellular phones

1. “Setup”  2. “Phone setup”  3. “List phones”

● Changing the passkey

1. “Setup”  2. “Phone setup”  3. “Set passkey”

● Deleting a cellular phone

1. “Setup”  2. “Phone setup”  3. “Delete”

3

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair phone” by using a voice command or the procedure for registering a cellular phone. ( 

P. 336)

, and do

347


Selecting a cellular phone to be used

Select “Select phone” by using a voice command or

Pattern A

Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

.

: a. Press or and say the desired phone name.

b. Press or and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud,

Pattern B

Select a cellular phone to be used by using

Changing a registered name

.

Select “Change name” by using a voice command or

.

Select a name of cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods: a. Press or and say the desired phone name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

.

348

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press or and say “List phones”. While the desired phone name is being read aloud, press or

.

c. Select the desired phone name by using .

Press or or select “(RECORD NAME)” by using

, and say a new name.

3

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

Listing the registered cellular phones

Select “List phones” by using a voice command or and the system begins reading aloud the list of the registered cellular phones.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone setup”.

Pressing or while a name of cellular phone is being read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be available:

• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select phone”

• Changing a registered name: “Change name”

• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete”

349


Changing the passkey

Select “Set passkey” by using a voice command or

Pattern A

Press or

.

, say a four to eight-digit number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

Pattern B

.

Select a four to eight-digit number by using .

The number should be input one digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press once again.

Deleting a cellular phone

Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press lular phone.

or and say the name of the desired cel-

350

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press or and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud,

Pattern B

Select a cellular phone to be deleted by using

■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered

Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

.

3

351


Security and system setup

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

■ Security setting items and operation procedure

● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)

1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN”

● Locking the phone book

1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phone book lock”

● Unlocking the phone book

1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phone book unlock”

■ System setup items and operation procedure

● Setting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup”  2. “(SYSTEM SETUP)”  3. “(GUIDANCE VOL)”

● Initialization

1. “Setup”  2. “(SYSTEM SETUP)”  3. “(INITIALIZE)”

can only be used for system setup operation.

Setting or changing the PIN

■ Setting a PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or

Enter a PIN by using a voice command or

When using , input the number one digit at a time.

.

.

352


■ Changing the PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or

.

Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .

When using , input the number one digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book

Select “Phone book lock (PHBK LOCK)” or “Phone book unlock (PHBK UNLOCK)” by using a voice command or

.

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or :

3 a. Press or and say the registered PIN.

b. Input a new PIN by using .

■ When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

● Dialing by inputting a name

● Speed dialing

353


● Dialing a phone number stored in the call history memory

● Using the phone book

Setting voice guidance volume

Select “(GUIDANCE VOL)” by using

Change the voice guidance volume.

To decrease the volume: Turn

.

counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.

Initialization

Select “(INITIALIZE)” and then “(CONFIRM)” by using

.

Select “(CONFIRM)” by using again.

■ Initialization

● The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book

• Outgoing and incoming history memory

• Speed dial data

• Registered cellular phone data

• PIN

● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored.

354


Using the phone book

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

● Adding a new phone number

1. “Phone book”  2. “Add entry”

● Changing a registered name

1. “Phone book”  2. “Change name”

● Listing the registered data

1. “Phone book”  2. “List names”

● Setting speed dial

1. “Phone book”  2. “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)”

● Deleting registered data

1. “Phone book”  2. “Delete entry”

● Deleting speed dial

1. “Phone book”  2. “Delete speed dial (DEL SPD DIAL)”

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

● Inputting a phone number by using a voice command

● Transferring data from the cellular phone

● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history memory

● Inputting a phone number by using

■ Adding procedure

Select “Add entry” by using a voice command or .

3

355


Use one of the following methods to input a phone number:

Inputting a phone number by using voice commands

STEP2-1 Select “By voice” by using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Press or , say the desired phone number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

Transferring data from the cellular phone

STEP2-1 Select “By phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Select the desired data by using .

356


Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history memory

STEP2-1 Select “Call history” by using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using 3 a voice command or .

.

b. Select the desired data by using

Inputting a phone number by using

STEP2-1 Select “(MANUAL INPUT)” by using .

STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using

once again.

Input the phone number one digit at a time.

, and press

357


Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press or and say the desired name.

b. Select “(RECORD NAME)” by using desired name.

, and say the

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or again.

In , selecting “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)” instead of

“Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial.

Setting speed dial

Select “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)” by using a voice command or .

Select the data to be registered as speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press or , say the desired phone number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

358

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press or , and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press or and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

,

.

c. Select the desired data by using .

Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by

3 using a voice command or .

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

Changing a registered name

Select “Change name” by using a voice command or

.

Select a name to be changed by either of the following methods.

a. Press or , say the desired name, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press or , and say “List names”. While the desired name is read aloud, press or .

359

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) c. Select the desired name by using .

Select “(RECORD NAME)” by using .

Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

Deleting registered data

Select “Delete entry” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press or , and say the name of the desired phone number to be deleted.

b. Press or , say “List phones”. While the name of the desired phone number is being read aloud, press or .

Pattern B

Select data to be deleted by using , and select

“(CONFIRM)” by using .

360


Deleting speed dial

Select “Delete speed dial (DEL SPD DIAL)” by using a voice command or .

Press the preset button for which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

.

Listing the registered data

Select “List names” by using a voice command and the system begins reading aloud the list of the registered data.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone book”.

3

Pressing or while an entry is being read aloud selects the entry, and the following functions will be available.

• Dialing: “Dial”

• Changing a registered name: “Change name”

• Deleting an entry: “Delete entry”

• Setting speed dial: “Set speed dial (SPEED DIAL)”

■ Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

361

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Your Toyota is equipped with an illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Due to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the engine switch position.

362

Outer foot lights (if equipped)

Interior light (

 P. 365)

Personal/interior lights (

 P. 364)

Engine switch light

Foot well lighting

Door courtesy lights

Ashtray lighting

3-5. Using the interior lights

Personal/interior light main switch

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

If the lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the personal/interior light main switch is in door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.



Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.


P. 569)


P. 169)

3

Personal/interior light main switch

ON

The personal/interior lights cannot be individually turned off.

DOOR position

The personal/interior lights come on when a door is opened. They turn off when the doors are closed.

OFF

The personal/interior lights and interior light can be individually turned on or off.

363


Personal/interior lights

Front (type A)

On/off


Front (type B)

On/off

Center (type A)

On/off

364

Center (type B)


Personal/interior lights and interior light

On/off

Rear

On/off

3

Interior light

DOOR position

The interior light comes on when a back door is opened. It turns off when the door is closed.

OFF

ON

365

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

366

Overhead console

Glove boxes

Auxiliary boxes

Bottle holders

Seatback table (if equipped)

Cup holders

Rear console box (if equipped)

Cup holder (if equipped)

Front console box

Card holder

Map holder

Pen holder

Tissue pocket

Map holder

Coin holder (if equipped)

Glove boxes

Upper glove box

3-6. Using the storage features

Glove boxes

Push the button.

Lower glove box

Unlock with the master key

Lock with the master key

3

Pull the lever up.

CAUTION


Keep the glove box closed.


367


Coin holder (if equipped)

Coin holder and front console box

Pull the lid down.

CAUTION


Keep the coin holder closed.


Front console box

Pull the knob up to release the lock. Lift the lid.

368


Front console box

■ When using the front console box lid as an armrest

Pull the knob up to release the lock. Slide the lid forward.

When the lid is forward, it cannot be lifted.

■ Tray in the front console box

The tray slides forward or backward. The tray can be removed.

3

The box can be removed. Hanging file folders can be hung on the rails when the box is removed.

369


Front console box and card holder

CAUTION


Keep the console box closed.


Card holder


370

Map holder

Center console


Map holder

Push the tab down to release the lock. Remove the lid.

Stow the lid.

3

371


Front console box

Map holder and pen holder


Pen holder


372

Tissue pocket


Tissue pocket and rear console box


Rear console box (if equipped)

Upper box

Push the knob to release the lock. Lift the lid.

3

373


Lower box

Rear console box


■ The separator can be stowed

Stow the separator.

■ The separator can be used at either of two positions shown in the illustration

374


Rear console box

■ Back side tray

■ The inside tray can be removed

Pull the tray up.

■ When closing the rear console box lid

Close the rear console box by lifting the lid up by the handle.

3

375


Rear console box and overhead console

CAUTION


Keep the console box closed.


■ When opening/closing the lower box

Be careful not to get your hands or feet caught in the lid.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury.

■ When opening the lower box

Make sure that the upper box is locked. Items stored inside may fall out and cause injury.

Overhead console

The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.

Type A

Push the knob forward.

376

Type B


Overhead console and cup holders

Push the knob forward.

CAUTION

■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.

If the interior of the vehicle become hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or becomes cracked.


Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.

Items stored in it may fall out and cause injury.

3

Cup holders

Front

377


Front console box

Pull the lid down.

Cup holders

Rear

378


Cup holders


Attach the separator when using either console box as a cup holder.

Both cup holders cannot be used at the same time.

3

■ Removing the cup holder (front)

Push the tab down to release the lock.

Remove the lid.

Stow the lid.

379


Pull the cup holder up.

Cup holders

■ Removing the separator (rear console box)

Inside

Pull the separator up.

Outside

Pull the separator up.

■ The separator can be adjusted

Adjust the separator.

380


Cup holders and bottle holders

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■ When not in use

Front console box and rear console box (inside) cup holder: Keep the cup holders closed.


NOTICE

■ Before sliding the center second seat to the most forward position

(vehicles with bench type second seat)

Ensure that the cup holder on the front console box is closed.

3

Bottle holders

Front

381


Rear

Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes

NOTICE

■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Auxiliary boxes

Front

Press the knob then pull the lid down.

382

Rear


Auxiliary boxes

Pull the lid up.


Pull the lever up to release the lock. Pull the handle.

3

CAUTION


Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.


383


Seatback table

Seatback table (if equipped on front passenger seat)

Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever and raise the seatback to its upright position.

Pull the seatback folding lever and fold the seatback down.

384


Seatback table

CAUTION

■ After folding a seat

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by lightly rocking the seat back and forth.

● Do not sit on the folded seatback.


Do not fold the seatback forward to set up the seatback table while the vehicle is moving.

3

385

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

■ Main visor

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

Side extender:

Place in side position then slide backwards.

■ Sub visor (if equipped)

Flip down.

386


Vanity mirrors

Vehicles without vanity light

Open the cover.

Vehicles with vanity light

Open the cover.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

Adjust the brightness of the light.

3

387


Clock

Adjusts the hours.

Adjusts the minutes.

■ For quicker adjustment of the clock

Hold down the M or H button continuously. This allows faster advancement of the minutes and hours.

■ The clock is displayed when


■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

388


Outside temperature display (if equipped)

Displays the outside air temperature.

The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F

(-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).

Switches the outside air temperature display between °C (Celsius) and

°F (Fahrenheit). (if equipped)

Vehicles without multi-information display:

Push the SETUP US/M button until the desired unit of measurement is displayed.

Vehicles with multi-information display:

With the customized unitchange operation for the multiinformation display, the unit of measurement can be changed.

(

 P. 172)

3

■ When – –°C or – –°F is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■ The outside air temperature is displayed when


■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The display will automatically be set to the initial mode.

389


Portable ashtray

The ashtray can be installed in a cup holder.

■ The ashtray can be removed

Pull the ashtray up.

CAUTION


Keep the ashtray closed.


■ To prevent fire

● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, and then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

390


Cigarette lighter

Push the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use.

■ The cigarette lighter can be used when


CAUTION

■ To avoid burns or fires

● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.

● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.

3

391


Conversation mirror

Push the lid.

The mirror can be adjusted by pushing the mirror edge.

392


Power outlets

The power outlet can be used for a following component.

12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.

115V AC: Audio device that use less than 100 W.

Instrument panel (12 V)

3

393

3-7. Other interior features

Inside the front console box (12 V)


Back of the front console box (12 V) *1

394


Back of the front console box (115V AC)

*2

Main switch

To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch.


Power outlet socket

3

Luggage compartment (12 V)

*1 : Vehicles without rear seat entertainment system

*2 : Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system

395


■ The power outlet can be used when

12V


115V AC


NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

12V

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

115V AC

Do not use a 115V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.

If a 115V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

■ Appliances that may not operate properly (115V AC)

The following 115V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W.

● Appliances with high initial peak wattage

● Measuring devices that process precise data

● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

396


Seat heaters (if equipped)

■ Front seat

On


Adjusts the seat temperature.

The further you turn the dial upward, the warmer the seat becomes.

3

397


■ Rear seat (vehicles with rear console box)

Press the LO or HI switch to warm the seats to a low or high temperature respectively.

High temperature

The indicator (yellow) comes on.

Low temperature

The indicator (green) comes on.

398


■ The seat heaters can be used when



Front seat: Turn the dial fully downward. The indicator turns off.

Rear seat (vehicles with rear console box): Push lightly on the opposite side.

The indicator turns off.

CAUTION

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

3

NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

399


Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)

Blows air from the seats

The indicator comes on. The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes.

Heats the seats

The indicator comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.

■ The seat heaters can be used when



Set the dial to 0. The indicator turns off.

400


CAUTION

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

3

NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

401


Armrests (if equipped)

Separated seat

Bench seat

Adjusting to the desired angle:

Lower the armrest from the highest position to the lowest position.

Raise the armrest to the desired angle.

Unlock the armrest:

Lift the armrest to raise it to the highest position.

Pull the armrest down for use.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the armrest

● Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

● Do not sit on the armrest.

402


Rear side sunshades (if equipped)

Rear door window

Pull the tab up.

Hook the sunshade onto the anchors.

To lower the sunshade, pull the tab slightly to unhook the shade, and lower it slowly.

3

Rear quarter window

Pull the tab up.

Hook the sunshade onto the anchors.

To lower the sunshade, pull the tab slightly to unhook the shade, and lower it slowly.

403


NOTICE

■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade


● Do not place anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of the sunshade.

● Do not place anything on the sunshade.

404


Floor mat

Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.

Secure the driver's floor mat using the hooks provided.

CAUTION

■ When inserting the floor mat


Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.

● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward.

● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.

3

405


Luggage compartment features

■ Tie-down hooks

Tie-down hooks are provided for securing loose items.

406

■ Cargo net hooks


To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks.

The cargo net itself is not included as original equipment.

3

407


■ Shopping bag hooks

To hang shopping bags, use the shopping bag hooks.

408

■ Auxiliary boxes

Type A


Pull the lever upwards to lift the deck board.

3

Type B (if equipped)

Open the cover.

409


CAUTION

■ When the tie-down hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the tie-down hooks to their retracted positions when they are not in use.


Keep the auxiliary box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

410


Garage door opener (if equipped)

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

The garage door opener (HomeLink

® tured under license from HomeLink

®

.

Universal Transceiver) is manufac-

Programming the HomeLink

®

(for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink

®

compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator

Buttons

3

■ Programming the HomeLink



Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink

® control buttons.

Keep the indicator on the

HomeLink

®

in view while programming.

411


Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink

®

and the button on the transmitter.

When the indicator on the

HomeLink

®

changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

Test the operation of the

HomeLink

®

by pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink

®

button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator (on the

HomeLink

®

) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling

Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink ® buttons.

412


■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink

®

” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

Press the training button.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink

®

button twice. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.

This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink

®

transceiver and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink

®

.

Keep the indicator on the HomeLink

®

in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink ® button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.

When the indicator on the HomeLink ® compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.

3

413


Test the operation of the HomeLink

®

by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

■ Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.

■ Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink

®

buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming instructions.

Operating the HomeLink ®

Press the appropriate HomeLink ® button. The HomeLink ® indicator on the HomeLink ® transceiver should turn on.

The HomeLink

®

continues to send a signal for a maximum of 20 seconds if the button is held in.

Erasing the entire HomeLink ® memory (all three programs)

Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink

®

memory.

414


■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink

®

.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the

IC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

3

CAUTION

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door may operate, so ensure that people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink

®

Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

415


Compass (if equipped)

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

■ Operation

To turn the compass on or off, press the switch.

■ Displays and directions

Display

N

NE

E

SE

S

SW

W

NW

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

416

Calibrating the compass


Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or accurate calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibration

Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Press the switch until a number

(1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

3

Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.

417


■ Circling calibration

When “CAL” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.

● A door is open.

CAUTION

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

■ When doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

418


NOTICE

■ To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

3

419


420


4

4-1. Maintenance and care ... 422

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior......... 422

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.......... 424

4-2. Maintenance ................... 427

Maintenance requirements.................. 427

General maintenance....... 429

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................ 432

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance................. 433

Do-it-yourself service precautions .................... 433

Hood ................................ 437

Engine compartment........ 438

Tires ................................. 454

Tire inflation pressure ...... 461

Wheels ............................. 465

Air conditioning filter......... 467

Wireless remote control battery............................ 470

Checking and replacing fuses .............................. 472

Light bulbs........................ 483

421

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

■ High pressure car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

■ Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.

Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

■ Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

422

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ To prevent deterioration and body corrosion

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects or bird droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

CAUTION

■ Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

4

NOTICE

■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces

Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

423

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

■ Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

■ Synthetic leather areas

● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.

● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

424


■ Cleaning the inside of the back window and the rear quarter windows

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the back window and the rear quarter windows, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antennas. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

4

CAUTION

■ Water in the vehicle

● Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

 P. 104)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

425


NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.

● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl or plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.

■ Cleaning the inside of the back window and the rear quarter windows

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antennas.

426

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.

■ General maintenance

Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

■ Scheduled maintenance

Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

4

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

427

4-2. Maintenance

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

■ Warning in handling of battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

 P. 449)

428


General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your

Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Battery

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Power steering fluid

Radiator/condenser/hoses

Washer fluid

Check points

Maintenance-free.

(

 P. 449)

At the correct level? (

 P. 446)


 P. 445)


 P. 440)

No fumes or strange sounds?


 P. 448)

Not blocked with foreign matter?

( 

P. 446)


 P. 452)

4

429

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

Check points

• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?

• Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in

P?

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?

• Not pull to one side when applied?

• Loss of brake effectiveness?

• Spongy feeling brake pedal?

• Pedal almost touches floor?

• Move smoothly and lock securely?

• Function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Headlights aimed correctly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?

• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?

• Are the belts undamaged?

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Has correct free play?

• No strange noises?

430

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Door

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Items

Tire

Check points

• Operate smoothly?

• The lock system works properly?

• Is there any leakage after parking?

• Inflation pressure is correct?

• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?

• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

4

431


Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/

M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:

● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

432

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections.

Items

Battery condition

Brake fluid level

Engine coolant level

Engine oil level

Fuses

(

(

(



(









P. 449)

P. 446)

P. 445)

P. 440)

P. 472)

Parts and tools

• Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)

• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent


• Funnel (used only for adding oil)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

4

433

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

Washer fluid

Items

( 

P. 483)

Power steering fluid level

( 

P. 448)

Radiator and condenser

( 

P. 446)

Tire inflation pressure (

 P. 461)

( 

P. 452)

Parts and tools

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver

• Automatic transmission fluid

DEXRON

®

II or III


• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)



• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

• Water

• Washer fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding washer fluid)

434


CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

■ When working near the cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch on, the cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.

4

435


NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner

Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

■ If the brake fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the brake fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

436


Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the hood catch lever and lift the hood.

CAUTION

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

4

437


Engine compartment

4.7 L V8 (2UZ-FE) engine

438

Washer fluid tank ( 

P. 452)

Engine oil level dipstick

( 

P. 440)

Engine coolant reservoir

( 

P. 445)

Engine oil filler cap

( 

P. 440)

Brake fluid reservoir

( 

P. 446)

Fuse box

Battery

( 

P. 472)

( 

P. 449)

Radiator

Condenser

( 

P. 446)

( 

P. 446)

Power steering fluid reservoir

( 

P. 448)

5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE) engine


Washer fluid tank ( 

P. 452)

Engine oil level dipstick

( 

P. 440)

Engine coolant reservoir

( 

P. 445)

Engine oil filler cap

( 

P. 440)

Brake fluid reservoir

( 

P. 446)

Fuse box

Battery

( 

P. 472)

( 

P. 449)

Radiator

Condenser

( 

P. 446)

( 

P. 446)

Power steering fluid reservoir

( 

P. 448)

4

439


Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.


Low

Full

440


Low

Full


■ Adding engine oil


If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

4


If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Oil grade

Items

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Clean funnel

441


Remove the oil filler cap, turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly.

Checking the dipstick.

Reinstall the filler cap, turning it clockwise.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows:


1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)


1.2 qt. (1.1 L, 1.0 lmp. qt.)

■ Recommended viscosity


Outside temperature

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.

*

: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.


SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20

*

: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil may be used. However,

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

442


■ How to read oil container labels

Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil.

■ Engine oil consumption

● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

● A new engine consumes more oil.

● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below:

1. Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown.

2. While pressing the trip meter reset button (

 P. 157), turn the engine

switch on.

Without multi-information display

3. Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays

000000.

With multi-information display

3. Continue to press and hold the button until “MAINT REQD RESET

MODE COMPLETE” appears on the multi-information display.

4

443


CAUTION

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

444


Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

FULL

LOW

If the level is on or below the

LOW line, add coolant up to the

FULL line.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31  F [-35  C])

Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44  F [-42  C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

4

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

445


NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and may cause burns.

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

446


■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

.

CAUTION

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

4

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

■ If you spill fluid

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

447


Power steering fluid

■ Fluid level

The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.

Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)

Full (when hot)

Add fluid (when hot)

Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])

Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F[10°C - 30°C])

■ Checking the fluid level

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Fluid type

Items

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

®

II or III

Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding fluid)

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again.

Check the fluid level.

448


CAUTION

■ Checking the fluid level

Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.

NOTICE

■ When adding fluid

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.

■ After replacing the reservoir cap

Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

Battery

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

4

449


■ Checking battery condition

Check the battery condition using the indicator color.

Type A

Blue: Good condition

White: Charging is necessary.


Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Type B

Green: Good condition

Dark: Charging is necessary.


Clear or light yellow: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

450


CAUTION

■ Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less).

The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

4

451


NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work, the washer tank may be empty.

Open the lid.

Add washer fluid.

CAUTION

■ When refilling the washer fluid

Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

452


NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

4

453


Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

■ Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the

“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

Front

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

■ The tire pressure warning system

Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (

 P. 507)

454


Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. ( 

P. 456)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.

● When changing the tire size.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch off.

While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. ( 

P. 553)

Ma ke sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.


4

455


Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times.

Wait for several minutes with the engine switch on, and then turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your

Toyota dealer.

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should by replaced if:

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

456


■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

■ Low profile tires

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or snow chains on snowy and/ or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.

(



P. 461, 558).

■ Tire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

4

457


2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

 P. 229)

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in several minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and then stays on after driving for about

20 minutes.

458


■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

MODEL/FCC IDs:

Transmitter: GQ4-32T

Receiver: GQ4-37R

IC (Canada) IDs:

Transmitter: 1470A-13T

Receiver: 1470A-9R

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

4

459


CAUTION

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.

● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

460


Tire inflation pressure

■ Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. ( 

P. 558)

4

461


■ Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Reinstall the tire valve cap.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel efficiency

● Reduced driving comfort and tire life

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

462


■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Poor sealing of the tire bead

● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

4

463


NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.

464


Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

Toyota does not recommend using:

● Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

● Bent wheels that have been straightened

■ Aluminum wheel precautions

● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 100 miles (160 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

4

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (except for spare tire) that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. ( 

P. 455)

465


CAUTION

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

466


Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box.

Slide off the damper.

4

Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.

467


Remove the filter cover.

■ Cleaning method

■ Replacement method

If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at

72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm 2 or bar).

If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your

Toyota dealer.

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The  “  UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

468


■ Checking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the system

● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.

● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

4

469


Wireless remote control battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■ You will need the following items:

Lithium battery CR2032

■ Replacing the battery

Remove the cover using a coin protected with tape etc.

Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

470


■ If the wireless remote control battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

● The wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced.

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your

Toyota dealer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION

■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children.

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

4

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery


● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

471


Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the engine switch off.

The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below.

Engine compartment

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Under the instrument panel

Remove the lid.

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” ( 

P. 475) for details about which fuse to check.

472


Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

4

473


Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

474

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■ Engine compartment


1 A/F

Fuse

2 HORN

3 EFI NO.1

4 IG2 MAIN

5 L2 RR2 SEAT

6 L1 RR2 SEAT

7 CDS FAN

8 DEICER

9 TOW TAIL

10 R2 RR2 SEAT

11 R1 RR2 SEAT

12 POWER NO.4

30 A

30 A

30 A

25 A

20 A

30 A

30 A

30 A

25 A

Ampere

15 A

10 A

25 A

Circuit

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Horn


INJ, MET, IGN fuses

Power third seat

Power third seat

Electric cooling fans

Windshield wiper de-icer

Trailer lights (tail lights)

Power third seat

Power third seat

Power windows

475

4


476

13

14

Fuse

FOG

15 TOW BRK

16 IMB

17 AM2

18 TOWING

19 ALT-S

20 TURN-HAZ

21 F/PMP

22 ETCS

23 MET-B

24 AMP

25 RAD NO.1

26

STOP

ECU-B1

30 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

30 A

5 A

15 A

15 A

Ampere

15 A

15 A

10 A

5 A

30 A

15 A

7.5 A

Front fog lights

Circuit

Stop lights, high mounted stoplight, vehicle stability control system, anti-lock brake system, shift lock system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, towing converter

Trailer brake controller

Engine immobilizer system

Starting system

Towing converter

Charging system

Turn signal lights, emergency flashers, towing converter

No circuit

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, electric throttle control system

Gauges and meters

Audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system

Audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system

Multiplex communication system,

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror, power outlets, power front driver’s seat, power tilt and power telescopic, power back door


27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

INJ

MET

IGN

Fuse

DOME

HEAD LH

HEAD LL

HEAD RH

HEAD RL

35 EFI NO.2

36 DEF I/UP

37 AIR SUS NO.2

38 SPARE

39 SPARE

40 SPARE

41 AIR SUS

5 A

7.5 A

5 A

15 A

30 A

50 A

Ampere

7.5 A

15 A

15 A

10 A

7.5 A

10 A

15 A

15 A

10 A

Circuit

Interior lights, personal lights, vanity lights, engine switch light, foot light, door courtesy lights, accessory meter, power back door, power third seat

Left-hand headlight

(high beam)

Left-hand headlight

(low beam)

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, ignition system

Gauges and meters

SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, engine immobilizer system, cruise control system

Right-hand headlight

(high beam)

Right-hand headlight

(low beam)

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, leak detection pump

No circuit

Electronically modulated air suspension system

Spare fuse

Spare fuse

Spare fuse


477

4


42

Fuse

PBD

43 RR HTR

44 H-LP CLN

45 DEFOG

46 SUB BATT

47

48

51

52

53

54

55

ABS1

ABS2

49 ST

50 HTR

LH-J/B

ALT

A/PUMP NO.1

A/PUMP NO.2

MAIN

Ampere

30 A

40 A

30 A

40 A

40 A

50 A

40 A

30 A

50 A

150 A

180 A

140 A

50 A

50 A

40 A

*

*

Circuit

Power back door


Headlight cleaner

Rear window defogger

Trailer towing

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system

Starting system


AM1, TAIL, PANEL, ACC, CIG, LH-

IG, 4WD, ECU-IG NO.1, BK/UP LP,

SEAT-HTR, A/C IG, ECU-IG NO.2,

WSH, WIPER, OBD, A/C, TI&TE,

FR P/SEAT RH, MIR, DR/LCK, FR

P/SEAT LH, CARGO LP, PWR

OUTLET, POWER NO.1 fuses

LH-J/B, HTR, SUB BATT, TOW

BRK, STOP, FOG, TOW TAIL,

DEICER fuses


Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

HEAD LL, HEAD RL,

HEAD LH, HEAD RH fuses

*

: Replace the fuse with one of the same ampere rating as the original.

478

■ Under the instrument panel


Fuse

1 INVERTER

2 FR P/SEAT LH

3 DR/LCK

4 POWER No.5

5 OBD

6 PWR OUTLET

7 AM1

8 A/C

9 MIR

10 POWER No.3

11 FR P/SEAT RH

12 TI&TE

13 S/ROOF

14

RR SEAT-HTR

RH

7.5 A

7.5 A

15 A

20 A

30 A

15 A

25 A

10 A

Ampere

15 A

30 A

25 A

30 A

7.5 A

15 A

Circuit

Power outlet (115 V)

Power front driver’s seat

Multiplex communication system

Power back door

On-board diagnosis system

Power outlets

Shift lock system, starting system, seat heaters


Outside rear view mirror control, outside rear view mirror heaters

Power windows

Power front passenger seat

Power tilt and power telescopic

Electric moon roof

Seat heaters

4

479


15

16

17

Fuse

ECU-IG No.1

AIR SUS IG

LH-IG

18 4WD

19

RR SEAT-HTR

LH

20 WSH

21 WIPER

22 ECU-IG No.2

23 TAIL

24 A/C IG

25 SEAT-HTR

20 A

10 A

20 A

30 A

7.5 A

15 A

10 A

20 A

Ampere

7.5 A

20 A

7.5 A

Circuit

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, multiplex communication system, intuitive parking assist system, power front driver’s seat, power tilt and power telescopic, shift lock, tire pressure warning system, accessory meter, trailer towing, power outlet, electric moon roof, power back door, head light cleaner


Back-up lights, charging system, gauge and meters, turn signal lights, air conditioning system, seat heaters, rear window defogger

Four-wheel drive control system

Seat heaters

Window washer

Wiper and washer

Multiplex communication system

Tail lights, trailer lights (tail lights), parking lights


Seat heater or Heated and ventilated seats

480


26

27

Fuse

PANEL

ACC

28 BK/UP LP

29 CIG

30 POWER No.1

Ampere

7.5 A

7.5 A

10 A

15 A

30 A

Circuit

Instrument panel lights, glove box light, ashtray, accessory meter, audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system, gauges and meters, air conditioning system, seat heater or heated and ventilated switches

Accessory meter, audio system, rear seat entertainment system, rear view monitor, navigation system, back-up lights, trailer lights

(back-up lights), multiplex communication system, power outlet, outside rear view mirror

Back-up light, gauges and meters

Cigarette lighter

Power windows, power back window

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ( 

P. 483)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

4

481


CAUTION

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire


Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

482


Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your

Toyota dealer.

■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (

 P. 554)

■ Front bulb locations

Front turn signal/ parking light

Headlight low beam

4

Headlight high beam

Front fog light

(if equipped)

Front side marker light

483


■ Rear bulb locations

Stop/tail and rear side marker light

Tail light

Rear turn signal light

Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlight high beam

Back-up light

License plate light

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

484


Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

■ Headlight low beam


4


485


■ Front turn signal/parking light


Remove the light bulb.

486


■ Front side marker light

Remove the fender liner clip.

Partly remove the fender liner and turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

4


487


■ Front fog light (if equipped)

Remove the bolts and partly remove the fender liner.

Turn the bulb counterclockwise.


488


■ Stop/tail and rear side marker light, rear turn signal light

Right side

Open the back door and remove the cover.

To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver or equivalent and cover as shown in the illustrations.

Left side (vehicles without speaker in the luggage)

Open the back door and remove the covers.


4

489


Left side (vehicles with speaker in the luggage)

Open the back door and remove the cover.


Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.






490

Tail light, back-up light


Remove the covers. (vehicles with power back door only)


Remove the nuts.

Remove the rear combination light assembly.

4

491



Tail light

Back-up light


Tail light

Back-up light

■ License plate light

Remove the screws and light unit.

492



■ Lights other than the above

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

• High mounted stoplight

• Outer foot light (if equipped)

• Side turn signal light (if equipped)

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ LED high mounted stoplight and side turn signal light

The high mounted stoplight and side turn signal light consists of a number of

LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

4

493


■ Installing the fender liner clips

Insert the clip.

CAUTION

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

494


5

5-1. Essential information .... 496

If your vehicle needs to be towed ........................ 496

If you think something is wrong ............................. 501

Fuel pump shut off system ........................... 502

Event data recorder ......... 503

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency.................... 505

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................ 505

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display) .......................... 514

If you have a flat tire......... 519

If the engine will not start................................ 529

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P................. 530

If you lose your keys ........ 531

If the vehicle battery is discharged ..................... 532

If your vehicle overheats ....................... 536

If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................. 539

495

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.

● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Towing eyelet

496

5-1. Essential information

■ Emergency towing procedure

The engine switch must be in the ACC (engine off) or the ON

(engine running) position.

4WD models: Put the front wheel drive control switch in 2WD.

Put the shift lever in N.


CAUTION

■ Caution while towing

● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains.

● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the four wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

■ Emergency towing eyelet precautions

● Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.

● Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.

● Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.

● To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

5

497


Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

■ To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.

498


Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the rear

2WD models

Turn the engine switch to the

ACC position.

4WD models

When not using a towing dolly, turn the engine switch to the

ACC position, shift the shift lever to N and put the front wheel drive control switch in 2WD.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (4WD models)

Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

● Do not tow the vehicle with the key removed or in the LOCK position.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

5

499


Using a flat bed truck

Front

If your Toyota is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45  .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

Apply the parking brake firmly.

500


If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Visible symptoms

● Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

● Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal

● Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal (if equipped)

■ Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

■ Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

5

501


Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

502


Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.

In a crash or a near car crash event

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:

● Engine speed

● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

● Vehicle speed

● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

● Position of the transmission shift lever

● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not

● Driver’s seat position

● Front passenger’s occupant classification

● SRS airbag deployment data

● SRS airbag system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

5

503


Disclosure of the data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

● An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

● Officially requested by the police or other authorities

● Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

● Ordered by a court of law

However, if necessary Toyota will:

● Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance

● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes

504

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])

5

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

505

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.


Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control system; or

• The emission control system.

SRS warning light


• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light


• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

(Canada)

(Flashing) and

VSC OFF and slip indicators


• The VSC;

• The TRAC; or

• The AUTO LSD system.

506



Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.

Power steering warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the variable flow control power steering system.

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)

*1

Indicates that a door or back door is not fully closed.

Check that all doors are closed.

5

(On the instrument cluster)

(On the center panel)

Driver’s seat belt reminder light


*2

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light


*3

Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

507


508

Warning light

*4

*4

(U.S.A.)

*5

Warning light/Details

Tire pressure warning light

• When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure.

• When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

Correction procedure

Adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Have the system checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Low fuel level warning light

Low level of fuel.

Refuel the vehicle.

Low washer fluid warning light

Low level of washer fluid.

Fill the tank.

Engine oil replacement reminder light

• Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds: Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.

• Comes on and remains:

Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.

Check and change the engine oil.



P. 514


*1

: Open door warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that any door is opened (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])

*2

: Driver's seat belt reminder:

The driver’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON or START position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*3

: Front passenger’s seat belt reminder:

The front passenger’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for

10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/ h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*4

: Vehicles without multi-information display

*5


■ Four-wheel drive system warning buzzer

The buzzer indicated that the transfer mode is not selected correctly.

■ Key reminder buzzer

The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).

■ Open moon roof reminder buzzer

The buzzer indicate that the moon roof is still opened (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is your vehicle low on gas?

If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

5

509


The light will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight, the reminder light to flash and buzzer to sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after several minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the temporary spare tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after several minutes.

■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

510


● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.

● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the engine switch is turned to the ON position, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (

 P. 443)


The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.


P. 569)

CAUTION

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

5

511


CAUTION

■ Maintenance of the tire

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

512


CAUTION

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

5

513


If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Toyota dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning message Details

(Flashing)

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high

A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high

A buzzer also sounds and the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on.

514


Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light Details

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.

The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Open door warning light also comes on.

Indicates that the back door is not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the back door is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).


Make sure that all of the doors are closed.

Closed the back door.

5

515


516

Warning light

(Flashing)

Details

Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged with the vehicle having reached a speed of more than 3 mph (5 km/h).

A buzzer also sounds intermittently.



Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.


Add washer fluid.

(U.S.A. only)

(U.S.A. only)

Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.


Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset).

Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.

Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.


Check and change the engine oil.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset).


Warning light

(if equipped)

(if equipped)

(Flashing)

(if equipped)

Details

Indicates that the fuel level is low.

A buzzer also sounds and the low fuel level warning light comes on.


Fill up the tank as soon as possible.

Indicates that the laser radar sensor is dirty or covered with ice.


Clean the sensor.

Indicates that the dynamic laser cruise control system is unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance.


If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent.

Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode).

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

5

(if equipped)

(Flashing)

Indicates that the dynamic laser cruise control system is malfunction.


Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control system off. And then turn the system on again.

517


■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil change system. ( 

P. 443)

■ Warning light display in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-vehicle distance closes.

● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed

● Immediately after cruise control speed is set

● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed

518


If you have a flat tire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

● Press the height control mode select switch to set the height control system to manual mode (if equipped)

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P.

● Stop the engine.

● Turn on the emergency flashers.

■ Location of the spare tire

5

■ Location of the jack and tools

519


Taking out the jack and tool bag

Pull the deck board up.

Remove the cover and loosen the strap.

Remove the tools.

Tighten

Loosen

520


Taking out the spare tire

Remove the cover.

Assemble the jack handle extension as shown.

Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise.

After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.

5

521


Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Lefthand side

Righthand side

Lefthand side

Righthand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear righthand side tire

Behind the rear lefthand side tire

In front of the front right-hand side tire

In front of the front left-hand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

522

Front


Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.

Front

Rear

Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

5

523


Installing the tire

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Tapered portion

Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.

Disc wheel sheet

Lower the vehicle.

524


Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m) *

*

: When used on aluminum wheel, apply 97 ft·lbf (131

N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

Lay down the tire with the outer side facing up, and install the holding bracket.

Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

Keep winding until three clicks are heard.

Stow the tools and jack securely.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (

 P. 455)

■ When using the temporary spare tire

As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the temporary spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

5

525


CAUTION

■ Using the jack

Improper use of the jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

● Do not use the jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Always check that the jack is securely set to the jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle will be injured.

■ Using the jack handle

Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.

■ Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

● Retighten the wheel nuts within 100 miles (160 km) of driving. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

● Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

526


CAUTION

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Steel wheel: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheel: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.


● Remember that your temporary spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use two temporary spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.


● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

■ Speed limit when using the temporary spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ Driving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

527

5


CAUTION

■ When the spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

● ABS & Brake assist

● VSC

● TRAC

● A-TRAC

● AUTO LSD

● Cruise control

● Navigation system

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:

● 4WD system

NOTICE

■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

■ When replacing the tires

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

528


If the engine will not start

If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting procedure ( 

P. 145) or releasing the steering lock (

 P. 146), confirm

the following points.

■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

● The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures.

● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(

 P. 96)

■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.


● The battery may be discharged. (

 P. 532)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.


● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (

 P. 532)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

5

529


If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

530


If you lose your keys

New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using one of the master keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate. ( 

P. 32)

■ If you lose all your master keys.

You cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced.

5

531


If the vehicle battery is discharged

.

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.

You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables.


532



If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the batteries. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

5

533


Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the vehicle's engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.

If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Avoiding a discharged battery

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

CAUTION

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

534


CAUTION

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.

● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

5

535


If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and call your local Toyota dealer.

536


The engine has cooled down sufficiently.

The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates C.

Check the engine coolant level.

Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses and under the vehicle.

Note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used.

Add engine coolant if required.

Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (

 P. 549)

5

Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

537


■ Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.

● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.

● Steam is coming from under the hood.

● “ENGINE COOLANT HOT” is shown on the multi-information display

(vehicles with multi-information display).

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

538


If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.

2WD models: Activate the AUTO LSD. (

 P. 212)

4WD models: Shift the front wheel drive control switch to

4L.

Then push the center differential lock switch. (

 P. 209)

Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

CAUTION

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

5

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

539


540


6

6-1. Specifications................. 542

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ...................... 542

Fuel information ............... 555

Tire information ................ 558

6-2. Customization ................ 569

Customizable features ..... 569

Items to initialize .............. 573

541

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height*

Wheelbase

Front tread

Rear tread

*

: Unladen vehicle

205.1 in. (5210 mm)

79.9 in. (2030 mm)

Without roof rails

74.6 in. (1895 mm)

With roof rails

77.0 in. (1955 mm)

122.0 in. (3100 mm)

67.9 in. (1725 mm)

69.1 in. (1755 mm)

542

6-1. Specifications

Weight

Model code

*1

UCK60L-GKASKA

UCK60L-GKALKA

UCK65L-GKASKA

UCK65L-GKALKA

USK60L-GKTSKA

USK60L-GKTLKA

USK65L-GKTLKA

USK65L-GKTZKA

Engine

4.7L V8

(2UZ-FE) engine

USK60L-GKTZKA

USK65L-GKTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE) engine

Driving system

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants+luggage)

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

1215 lb. (550 kg)

1240 lb. (560 kg)

1275 lb. (575 kg)

1300 lb. (585 kg)

1310 lb. (590 kg)

1330 lb. (600 kg)

1315 lb. (595 kg)

1210 lb. (545 kg)

1230 lb. (555 kg)

1220 lb. (550 kg)

Towing capacity

(Trailer weight + cargo)

6300 lb. (2855 kg) *2

7800 lb. (3535 kg)

*3

6200 lb. (2810 kg)

*2

7700 lb. (3490 kg)

*3

6000 lb. (2720 kg) *2

7500 lb. (3400 kg)

*3

5600 lb. (2540 kg)

*2

7100 lb. (3220 kg)

*3

8300 lb. (3760 kg)

*2

10000 lb. (4535 kg)

* 3

8200 lb. (3715 kg)

*2

9500 lb. (4305 kg)

*3

8100 lb. (3670 kg)

*2

9100 lb. (4125 kg) *3

8000 lb. (3625 kg)

*2

9600 lb. (4350 kg)

*3

7900 lb. (3580 kg)

*2

9100 lb. (4125 kg) *3

7800 lb. (3535 kg)

*2

8800 lb. (3990 kg)

*3

*1

: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (

 P. 544)

*2

: Without towing package

*3

: With towing package

6

543

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the

Certification Label.

544

6-1. Specifications

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.



545

6

6-1. Specifications

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

2UZ-FE, 3UR-FE

8-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline


3.70  3.31 in. (94.0  84.0 mm)


3.70  4.02 in. (94.0  102.0 mm)


284.5 cu.in. (4664 cm

3

)


345.4 cu.in. (5663 cm

3

)

Automatic adjustment

Unleaded gasoline only

87 (Research octane number 91) or higher

26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.)

546

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system


Oil capacity drain and refill

(Reference)

With filter 6.6 qt. (6.2 L, 5.5 Imp.qt.)

Without filter

Oil grade

6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp.qt.)


Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below.

Recommended oil viscosity

Outside temperature

*: 5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.

Oil viscosity

● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.

6

547

6-1. Specifications


Oil capacity drain and refill

(Reference)

With filter 7.4 qt. (7.0 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)

Without filter

Oil grade

6.9 qt. (6.6 L, 5.8 Imp.qt.)


Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below.


Outside temperature

Oil viscosity

● The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

● The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.

548

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

Coolant type

4.7 L V8

(2UZ-FE) engine

5.7 L V8

(3UR-FE) engine

13.3 qt. (12.6 L, 11.0 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles without towing package

14.5 qt. (13.7 L, 12.0 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with towing package

15.4 qt. (14.6 L, 12.8 Imp. qt.)

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug


Make DENSO

NGK

Gap


Make DENSO

Gap

SK20R11

IFR6A11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

SK20HR11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

6

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

549

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage at

68  F (20  C):

12.6  12.8 V Fully charged

12.2  12.4 V Half charged

11.8  12.0 V Discharged

(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off)

5 A max.

Charging rates

Differential

Oil capacity

Front

(4WD models)

Rear

Oil type and viscosity

2.17 qt. (2.05 L, 1.51 Imp.qt.)

1.64 qt. (1.55 L, 1.14 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil

LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

“Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

550

6-1. Specifications

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity

*

4.7 L V8

(2UZ-FE) engine

5.7 L V8

(3UR-FE) engine


11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp.qt.)


11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp.qt.)


11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp.qt.)


12.4 qt. (11.7 L, 10.3 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS Fluid type

*

: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ Automatic transmission fluid type

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Transfer (4WD models)

Oil capacity

Oil type


1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)

Gear oil API GL-5

SAE 75W-90

6

551

6-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance

* 1

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

4.1 in. (104 mm) Min.

0.04  0.20 in. (1  5 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

Parking brake pedal travel

* 2

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

6 — 9 clicks

Fluid type FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

* 1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,

50 kgf) with the engine running.

* 2

: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.1 lbf (300 N,

30.6 kgf).

Chassis lubrication

Propeller shafts Spider

Slide yoke

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Molybdenum — disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Steering

Free play

Power steering fluid type

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

®

II or III

552

6-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels

Type A

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P275/65R18 114T,

P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)

Front tires:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm 2 or bar)

Rear tires:


Spare tire:


18  8J

Steel wheels:

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheels:

97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

Type B

Tire size


(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P275/55R20 111H,

P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)

Front tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

Rear tires:


2

or bar)

Spare tire:


2

or bar)

20  8J,

18  8J (spare wheel)

Steel wheels:

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheels:

97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

6

553

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Interior

Light Bulbs

Headlights

(high beam)

Headlights

(low beam)

Front fog lights

Front side marker lights

Front turn signal/parking lights

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Tail lights

Back-up lights

License plate lights

Outer foot light

Vanity lights


Front

Center

Rear

Interior light

Glove box light

Foot well lighting

Door courtesy lights

A: HB3 halogen bulbs

B: H11 halogen bulbs

C: H10 halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

F: Double end bulbs

554

—

—

—

7506

74

—

168

Bulb No.

9005

9704

9145

168

4157NAK

—

7443

194

921

—

—

7065

W

60

55

45

5

27/8

21

21/5

3.8

16

5

5

1.4

5

1.2

1.4

5

5

5

5

Type

A

D

D

D

F

D

D

E

E

B

C

D

D

D

F

D

D

D

D


Fuel information

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane

Number 91) or higher required for optimum engine performance.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Toyota dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Gasoline quality standards

● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.

■ Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.

6

555

6-1. Specifications

■ Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■ Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline

● Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

● If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■ Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT

(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

556

6-1. Specifications

NOTICE

■ Notice on gasoline quality

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol.

It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

6

557


Tire information

Typical tire symbols

558

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Location of treadwear indicators

Tire ply composition and materials

(

(

(







P. 560)

P. 559)

P. 561)

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

 P. 563)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

 P. 563)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

6-1. Specifications

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

Summer tire or all season tire (

 P. 561)

An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire.

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

*

:The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards.

6

559

6-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

560

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Uniform tire quality grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S.A. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

6

561

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering

(turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

562

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(c) Vehicle capacity weight

(d) Production options weight

6

563

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Normal occupant weight

Occupant distribution

Production options weight

Rim

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Meaning

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1

*

that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1

*

below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1

*

below), and dividing it by two

564

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

CT

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

Meaning

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

565

6

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Meaning

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b)The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less

566

6-1. Specifications

Ply

Tire related term

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

Test rim

Meaning

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

567

6

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators(TWI)

Meaning

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

* :Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

2

3

5

7

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

568

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Toyota dealership.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Item

Wireless remote control

( 

P. 33)

Function


Unlocking operation

Default setting

ON

Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers)

Operation signal

(Buzzer)

Panic function

Buzzer sounds when pushing LOCK with any door not closed

ON

60 seconds

ON

ON

ON

ON

Customized setting

OFF

All doors unlocked in one step

OFF

0 seconds

30 seconds

120 seconds

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

569

6

6-2. Customization

Item


( 

P. 33)

Power back door operation

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Push twice*

Push and hold

One short push*

Push and hold One short push

ON OFF

Power back door

( 

P. 41)

Door lock

( 

P. 37)

Switch operation

Wireless remote control linked operation

Operation signal volume

Operation when door locks

Time elapsed before back door closing function is activated when pushing switch in the luggage compartment

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Opening driver’s door unlocks all doors.

Shifting gears to “P” unlocks all doors.

Shifting gears to position other than “P” locks all doors.

OFF

Possible

1.5 seconds

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Impossible

0 seconds

1 seconds

2 seconds

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

*: It is possible to select them only when the power back door operation with the open/close switch is made impossible when the door is locked.

570

6-2. Customization

Item

Door lock

( 

P. 37)

Power windows

( 

P. 85)

Function

Unlocking using a key

Door key linked operation

Default setting

Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

Customized setting

All doors unlocked in one step

Open and close

Open only

Close only

OFF

Open only

Close only

OFF

Automatic light off system

( 

P. 175)

Door key linked operation

Open and close

Moon roof

( 

P. 89)

Back window

( 

P. 87)

Rear window wiper and washer

( 

P. 181)

Linked operation of components when door key is used

Light sensor sensitivity

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

Linked back door key operation

Sensitivity of jam protection function

Washer linkage wiper control

Drip prevention function

Slide only

Level 3

30 seconds

Open and close

Level 1

ON

ON

Tilt only

Level 1 to 5

0 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Open only

Close only

Level 2 to 4

OFF

OFF

6

571

6-2. Customization

Item

Illumination

( 

P. 362)

Seat Belt

Reminder

Buzzer

( 

P. 507)

Function

Time elapsed before lights turn off

Operation after the engine is off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer

Default setting

15 seconds

ON

ON

Customized setting

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

OFF

OFF

ON OFF

572

6-2. Customization

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.

Engine oil maintenance data

Item

Power back door

Tire pressure warning system

When to initialize

• After reconnecting or changing the battery.

• After changing a fuse.

After changing engine oil

• When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

• When changing the tire size.

Reference

P. 41

P. 443

P. 454

6

573

6-2. Customization

574

For owners

7

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners ................... 576

Seat belt instructions for

Canadican owners

(in French) ..................... 577

575

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:

1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave,

S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

.

576

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

577

7

578

579

7

580

Index

Abbreviation list ..................... 582

Alphabetical index.................. 584

What to do if............................ 592

For details of equipment related to the navigation system and navigation system screen, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner's Manual".

581

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

M + S

MMT

MTBE

OBD

PWR

RES

GAWR

GCWR

GVWR

I/M

INT

INFO

LED

LT

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

2WD Two Wheel Drive

4WD

ABS

ACC

AI-SHIFT

Four Wheel Drive

Anti-Lock Brake System

Accessory

Artificial Intelligence shifting

ALR

A-TRAC

AUTO LSD

AVS

CRS

ECU

EDR

ELR

Automatic Locking Retractor

Active Traction Control

Automatic Limited Slip Differential

Adaptive Variable Suspension System

Child Restraint System

Electronic Control Unit

Event Data Recorder

Emergency Locking Retractor

Gross Axle Weight Rating

Gross Combination Weight Rating

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

Emission inspection and maintenance

Intermittent

Information

Light Emitting Diode

Light truck

Mud + Snow

Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

On Board Diagnostics

Power

Resume

582

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

RSCA Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbags

SRS

TIN

TPMS

TRAC

Supplemental Restraint System

Tire Identification Number

Tire Pressure Warning System

Traction Control

TWI

US/M

VIN

VSC

Treadwear indicators

U.S. Customary System and metric

Vehicle Identification Number

Vehicle Stability Control

583

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A

A/C.....................................250, 258

ABS ...........................................214

Adaptive variable suspension

system ....................................207

Air conditioning filter...............467

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter..............467

Front air conditioning

system ................................250

Rear air conditioning

system ................................258

Airbags

Airbag operating

conditions............................106

Airbag precautions for your

child ....................................110

Airbag warning light...............506

Curtain shield airbag operating

conditions............................106

Curtain shield airbag

precautions .........................110

Front passenger occupant

classification system ...........116

General airbag

precautions .........................110

Locations of airbags ..............103

Modification and disposal of

airbags ................................114

Proper driving

posture........................101, 110

Side airbag operating

conditions............................106

Side airbag precautions ........110

SRS airbags ..........................103

Alarm...........................................98

Antenna.....................................272

Anti-lock brake system............214

Armrest .....................................402

Ashtrays....................................390

Audio input ...............................294

Audio system

A/V input adapter ..................319

Antenna.................................272

584

Audio input ............................294

Audio visual input..................319

AUX adapter .........................294

CD player/changer ................275

DVD player............................305

MP3/WMA disc .....................283

Optimal use...........................292

Portable music player ...........294

Radio.....................................269

Rear seat entertainment

system ................................298

Steering wheel audio

switch..................................296

Type ......................................266

Audio visual input....................319

AUTO LSD system ...................212

Automatic light control

system ....................................176

Automatic

transmission ..................148, 152

AUX adapter .............................294

Auxiliary box ........................... 382

A/V input adapter .....................319

AVS ...........................................207

B

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs.............483

Wattage.................................554

Back door

Back door................................41

Wireless remote control ..........33

Back window ...........................87

Battery

Checking ...............................450

If the vehicle has discharged

battery.................................532

Preparing and checking before

winter ..................................229

Bluetooth



................................333

Bottle holder.............................381

Brakes

Fluid ......................................446

Parking brake........................156

Alphabetical index

Brake assist ............................. 214

Break-in tips ............................ 137

C

Card holder .............................. 370

Care

Exterior ................................. 422

Interior .................................. 424

Seat belts ............................. 425

Cargo capacity ........................ 228

Cargo hooks ............................ 407

CD changer .............................. 275

CD player ................................. 275

Chains ...................................... 229

Child restraint system

Booster seats, definition ....... 121

Booster seats, installation .... 127

Convertible seats,

definition............................. 121

Convertible seats,

installation .......................... 126

Front passenger occupant

classification system .......... 116

Infant seats, definition .......... 121

Infant seats, installation........ 125

Installing CRS with lower

anchorages ........................ 128

Installing CRS with seat

belts ................................... 125

Installing CRS with top

straps ................................. 130

Child safety

Airbag precautions ............... 110

Battery precautions ...... 451, 534

Child restraint system........... 121

Child-protectors ...................... 38

How your child should wear

the seat belt ......................... 70

Installing child restraints ....... 124

Moon roof precautions............ 91

Power window lock switch...... 85

Power window precautions..... 86

Removed key battery

precautions ........................ 471

Seat belt extender

precautions ...........................72

Seat belt precautions ..............71

Seat heater precautions ........399

Child-protectors .........................38

Cigarette lighter .......................391

Cleaning

Exterior..................................422

Interior ...................................424

Seat belts ..............................425

Climate control seat.................400

Clock ........................................ 388

Coin holder ...............................368

Compass...................................416

Condenser ................................446

Console box .....................368, 373

Conversation mirror ................392

Cooling system

Engine overheating ...............536

CRS ...........................................121

Cruise control

Cruise control ........................183

Dynamic radar cruise

control .................................186

Cup holders ..............................377

Curtain shield airbags .............103

Customizable features.............569

D

Daytime running light

system ....................................176

Defogger

Rear window .........................262

Side mirrors...........................262

Dimension.................................542

Dinghy towing ..........................246

Display

Trip information .....................167

Warning message .................514

Do-it-yourself maintenance.....433

Door courtesy lights

Door courtesy lights ..............362

Wattage.................................554

585

Alphabetical index

Doors

Back door ................................41

Door glasses ...........................85

Door lock ...........................33, 37

Side doors ...............................37

Side mirrors.............................79

Driver's seat belt reminder

light .........................................507

Driving

Break-in tips ..........................137

Correct posture .....................101

Procedures............................136

Winter driving tips..................229

Driving position memory...........59

DVD player................................305

E Electronically modulated air

suspension.............................202

Emergency, in case of

If the engine will not start ......529

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted .................................530

If the vehicle has discharged

battery.................................532

If the warning buzzer

sounds ................................505

If the warning light turns

on........................................505

If the warning message is

displayed.............................514

If you have a flat tire .............519

If you lose your keys .............531

If you think something is

wrong ..................................501

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................539

If your vehicle needs to be

towed ..................................496

If your vehicle overheats .......536

Engine

Compartment ........................438

Engine switch ........................145

Hood......................................437

586

How to start the

engine.................................145

Identification number.............544

If the engine will not start ......529

Ignition switch ......................145

Overheating ..........................536

Engine coolant

Capacity ................................549

Checking ...............................445


winter ..................................229

Engine coolant temperature

gauge......................................157

Engine immobilizer system ......96

Engine oil

Capacity ................................547

Checking ...............................440


winter ..................................229

Engine oil maintenance

data .........................................443

Engine switch...........................145

Event data recorder .................503

F

Floor mat ..................................405

Fluid

Brake.....................................446

Washer..................................452

Fog lights


Switch ...................................178

Wattage.................................554

Four-wheel drive system.........208

Front air conditioning

system ....................................250

Front fog lights


Switch ...................................178

Wattage.................................554

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............116

Front passenger's seat belt

reminder light ........................507

Alphabetical index

Front seats

Adjustment ............................. 46

Front side marker lights

Replacing light bulbs ............ 483

Switch................................... 175

Wattage ................................ 554

Front turn signal lights


Wattage ................................ 554

Fuel

Capacity ............................... 546

Fuel gauge ........................... 157

Fuel pump shut off system ... 502

Gas station information ........ 596

Information ........................... 555

Refueling ................................ 92

Type ..................................... 546

Fuel door.................................... 92

Fuel filler door ........................... 92

Fuel pump shut off system .... 502

Fuses........................................ 472

G

Garage door opener................ 411

Gas station information.......... 596

Gauges ..................................... 157

Glove box................................. 367

H Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ............... 329

Head restraints

Adjusting ................................ 62

Headlight cleaner .................... 182

Headlights


Switch................................... 175

Wattage ................................ 554

Heaters

Seat heaters ................. 397, 400

Side mirror............................ 262

Height control

Electronically modulated air

suspension......................... 202

Hood..........................................437

Hooks

Cargo net ..............................407

Shopping bag ........................408

I

I/M test.......................................432

Identification

Engine ...................................545

Vehicle ..................................544

Ignition switch..........................145

Illuminated entry system.........362

Indicator lights .........................162

Initialization

Items to initialize....................573

Inside rear view mirror ..............76

Interior lights

Interior lights..........................362

Switch....................................363

Wattage.................................554

Instrument panel light

control ....................................161

Intuitive parking assist ............196

J Jack

Replacing the wheel..............519

Jack handle ..............................519

K

Keyless entry..............................33

Keys

Engine switch ........................145

If you lose your keys .............531

Ignition switch........................145

Keyless entry...........................33

Key number.............................32

Keys ........................................32


key ........................................33

L License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs .............483

Wattage.................................554

587

Alphabetical index

Light bulbs

Replacing ..............................483

Wattage.................................554

Lights

Door courtesy lights ..............362

Fog light switch .....................178

Headlight switch ....................175

Interior light switch ........364, 365

Outer foot lights.....................362

Personal light switch .............364


Turn signal lever....................155

Vanity lights...........................387

Wattage.................................554

Load capacity ...........................228

Lock steering column..............146

Luggage compartment

features...................................406

M Maintenance

Do-it-yourself

maintenance .......................433

General maintenance............429

Maintenance data..................542

Maintenance requirements....427

Map holder................................371

Meter

Accessory meter ...................172

Instrument panel light

control .................................161

Meters ...................................157

Mirrors

Conversation mirror...............392

Inside rear view mirror.............76

Side mirror heaters................262

Side mirrors.............................79

Vanity mirrors ........................387

Moon roof ...................................89

MP3 disc ...................................283

Multi-information

display ....................................167

O

Odometer..................................157

Off-road precautions ...............219

Oil

Engine oil ..............................440

Opener

Back door................................41

Fuel door.................................92

Fuel filler door .........................92

Hood .....................................437

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding...............79

Outside temperature

display ....................................389

Overhead console....................376

Overheating, Engine................536

P

Parking assist ..........................196

Parking brake ...........................156

Parking lights


Switch ...................................175

Wattage.................................554

Pen holder ................................372

Personal lights

Switch ...................................364

Wattage.................................554

Power back door........................42

Power back window...................87

Power outlet .............................393

Power windows..........................85

R

Radar cruise control................186

Radiator ....................................446

Radio.........................................269

Rear air conditioning

system ....................................258

Rear console box.....................373

Rear seat

Adjustment ..............................49

Folding down second

seatback ...............................53

588

Alphabetical index

Folding down third

seatback............................... 55

Rear seat entertainment

system ................................... 298

Rear seat entertainment

system controller battery..... 302

Rear side sunshade ................ 403

Rear turn signal lights


Wattage ................................ 554

Rear view mirror

Anti-glare .......................... 76, 81

Compass .............................. 416

Rear window defogger............ 262

Rear window wiper.................. 181

Replacing

Fuses.................................... 472

Key battery ........................... 470

Light bulbs ............................ 483

Tires ..................................... 519

Reporting safety defects for

U.S.A. owners........................ 576

Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch...... 115

Roof luggage carrier ................. 83

S

Seatback table ......................... 384

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ............ 64

ALR ........................................ 69

Automatic Locking

Retractor .............................. 69

Child restraint system

installation .......................... 124

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts...................... 425

Comfort guide......................... 67

ELR ........................................ 69

Emergency Locking

Retractor .............................. 69

How to wear your seat belt..... 64

How your child should wear

the seat belt ......................... 70

Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use .................................69

Reminder light .......................507

Seat belt extenders .................70

Seat belt pretensioners ...........68

Seat heaters..............................397

Seating capacity.......................228

Seats

Adjustment ........................46, 49

Adjustment precaution ......48, 58

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............124

Cleaning ................................424

Climate control seat ..............400

Driver’s seat position

memory.................................59

Head restraint..........................62

Properly sitting in the seat.....101

Seat heaters..................397, 400

Seat heaters and

ventilators ...........................400

Service reminder

indicators ..............................162

Shift lever

Automatic

transmission................148, 152

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted ............................530

Shift lock system .....................530

Shopping bag hooks ...............408

Side airbags..............................103

Side marker lights

Replacing ..............................483

Switch....................................175

Wattage.................................554

Side mirrors

Adjusting and folding...............79

Spare tire

Inflation pressure...................553

Spare tire...............................519

Spark plug ................................549

Specifications...........................542

Speedometer ............................157

589

Alphabetical index

Steering

Column lock release..............146

Steering wheel

Adjustment ..............................74

Audio switches ......................296

Climate remote control

switches ..............................264

Steering wheel memory ..........59

Telephone switches ..............334

Stop lights


Wattage.................................554

Storage feature.........................366

Storage precautions ................226

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................539

Sun visors.................................386

Sunshade..................................403

Switch

Engine switch ........................145

Fog light switch .....................178

Ignition switch........................145

Light switches........................175

Power back door switch ....33, 42

Power back window switch .....87

Power door lock switch ...........37

Power window switch ..............85

Rear window wiper and

washer switch .....................181

Seatback folding/returning

switch..............................52, 57

Window lock switch .................85

Wiper and washer

switch..........................179, 181

T

Tachometer...............................157

Tail lights


Switch....................................175

Wattage.................................554

Talk switch................................334

Telephone switch.....................334

590

Theft deterrent system

Alarm.......................................98

Engine immobilizer system .....96

Theft prevention labels ...........100

Tire inflation pressure .............461

Tire information

Glossary................................563

Size .......................................560

Tire identification number......559

Uniform tire quality

grading................................561

Tires

Chains...................................230

Checking ...............................454

If you have a flat tire..............519

Inflation pressure ..........461, 596

Information ............................558

Replacing ..............................519

Rotating tires.........................454

Size .......................................553

Snow tires .............................229

Tire pressure warning

system ........................454, 508

Tissue pocket...........................373

Tools .........................................519

Total load capacity ..................228

Towing

Dinghy towing .......................246

Emergency towing ................496

Trailer towing ........................233

Traction control .......................214

TRAC.........................................214

Trip information .......................167

Trip meter .................................157

Turn signal lights


Switch ...................................155

Wattage.................................554

Alphabetical index

V

Valet key..................................... 32

Vanity lights

Vanity lights .......................... 387

Wattage ................................ 554

Vanity mirrors.......................... 387

Vehicle identification

number................................... 544

Vehicle stability control.......... 214

VSC........................................... 214

W Warning buzzers

Brake system........................ 505

Open door ............................ 507

Seat belt reminder ................ 507

Warning lights

ABS ...................................... 506

Airbag system....................... 506

Anti-lock brake system ......... 506

Brake assist system ............. 506

Brake system........................ 505

Charging system .................. 505

Electronic engine control

system................................ 506

Engine oil pressure............... 506

Malfunction indicator lamp.... 506

Master warning light ............. 508

Open door ............................ 507

Pretensioners ....................... 506

Seat belt reminder light ........ 507

SRS airbags ......................... 506

Tire pressure warning light ... 508

Warning messages ................. 514

Washer

Checking .............................. 452

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 229

Switch........................... 179, 181

Washing and waxing............... 422

Weight

Cargo capacity ..................... 224

Load limits ............................ 228

Weight .................................. 543

Wheels...................................... 465

Window glasses ..................85, 87

Window lock switch...................85

Windows

Power back window ................87

Power windows .......................85

Rear window defogger ..........262

Washer..........................179, 181

Windshield wiper de-icer.........263

Windshield wipers ...................179

Wireless remote control key

Replacing the battery ............470

Wireless remote control ..........33

WMA disc..................................283

591

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 519

If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

The shift lever cannot be moved out

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

P. 529

P. 96

P. 532

If the engine will not start

Engine immobilizer system

If the vehicle battery is discharged

P. 530

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 536

If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 531

If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

The doors cannot be locked

The horn begins to sound.

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

592

P. 532

If the vehicle battery is discharged

P. 37

P. 41

Side doors

Back door

P. 98

Alarm

P. 539

If the vehicle becomes stuck

What to do if...

The warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 505

If a warning light turns on

■ Instrument cluster



■ Center panel

593

What to do if...

■ Warning lights or

Brake system warning light

P. 505

Charging system warning light

P. 505

Malfunction indicator lamp

P. 506

ABS warning light or

P. 506

Engine oil replacement reminder light

P. 507

SRS warning light

P. 506

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light

P. 506

Low washer fluid warning light

P. 507

Power steering warning light

P. 506

and

Master warning light

P. 507

VSC OFF indicator and slip indicator*

P. 506

Tire pressure warning light

P. 507

Open door warning light

P. 507

Low fuel level warning light

P. 507

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

P. 507

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 507

*: VSC OFF indicator flashes and slip indicator comes on.

The warning message is displayed

P. 514

If a warning message is displayed

594

Memo

595

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 437

Fuel filler door

P. 92

596

Hood lock release lever

P. 437


P. 553

Fuel tank capacity

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill)

4.7 L V8

(2UZ-FE) engine

5.7 L V8

(3UR-FE) engine

Engine oil type

26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.)

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

P. 553

With filter

Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

6.6 (6.2, 5.5)

6.0 (5.7, 5.0)

With filter

Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

7.4 (7.0, 6.2)

6.9 (6.6, 5.8)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

Oil grade:

P. 547


Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W-30 (4.7 L V8 [2UZ-FE] engine)

SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 (5.7 L V8 [3UR-FE] engine)